JP7354013B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

As a game machine, a game medium such as a game ball is fired into a game area by a firing device, and when the game medium enters a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area and an execution condition (starting condition) is satisfied, A pachinko machine that increases gaming interest through a so-called variable display game, in which multiple types of identification information (hereinafter referred to as display symbols) are variably displayed on a variable display device, and whether or not to give a predetermined gaming value is determined based on the display result. There are gaming machines. In such a pachinko game machine, when the variable display of the display symbols in the variable display game completely stops and the stopped symbol mode becomes a specific display mode, an advantageous state (jackpot game state) advantageous to the player occurs. In the jackpot game state, a round game in which the jackpot is opened can be repeatedly executed up to a predetermined upper limit number of times.

As such a gaming machine, a gaming machine has been proposed that opens the big prize opening earlier than the display switching timing of the number of rounds (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP2017-104625A

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, although the possibility of winning a prize in the grand prize opening increases if the game medium is fired before the number of rounds is displayed, This is still not sufficient from the viewpoint of displaying the information, and there is a risk that the player may feel uneasy and lose interest in the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent a decline in interest in gaming.

(A) In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
a variable winning means that can change between a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win;
A control means capable of executing a round game that changes the variable winning means to the first state,
When the round game is played, after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, displaying an award amount display regarding the award amount of gaming value;
If the game medium does not win in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that no gaming value has been awarded can be displayed at the start of the award amount display;
If the game medium wins in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a count-up display corresponding to the award of gaming value is performed at the start of the award amount display, and then a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed. It is possible to display
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a special effect that notifies that the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
A specific performance can be executed before the special performance is executed,
The display means is
The pseudo movable body display can be displayed in a moving manner in the specific performance and the special performance,
When moving and displaying the pseudo movable object display in the specific performance, the pseudo movable object display can be moved from the first display position to the second display position and then hidden;
When moving and displaying the pseudo movable object display in the special performance, the pseudo movable object display can be moved from the first display position to the second display position and then hidden;
It is characterized by
Furthermore, in order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine according to the present invention includes:
A gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that instructs display content to the image display device 5, etc.);
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change between a first state where the game medium is easy to win and a second state where the game medium is impossible or difficult to win;
When controlled to be in the advantageous state, a control means that can execute a round game a plurality of times (for example, CPU 103 for playing round games, etc.);
The display means is
It is possible to display an award amount display regarding the award amount of the gaming value that is awarded due to the winning of the gaming medium in the variable winning means (for example, displaying the number of acquisitions),
When the first round game among the plurality of round games is played, the award amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, the number of wins is displayed after a predetermined period of time after the big prize opening is opened, etc.)
If the game medium does not win in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been given is displayed as the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the number of acquired (e.g. displaying "0000" as the display),
If the game medium wins the variable prize winning means within the predetermined period, a count-up display indicating that the gaming value has been given is performed, and then, according to the gaming value given as the specific display, (For example, a count-up display is performed to notify that the number of acquisitions will increase, and then "0015" is displayed.)
moreover,
a movable body that is movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
a pseudo movable body display effect that moves and displays the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position;
a movable body effect that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position;
is executable,
It is better to perform the movable body performance and the pseudo movable body display performance in a predetermined period by the performance execution means, and to display the pseudo movable body without executing the movable body performance in the predetermined period. The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the body display performance is executed.
It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety. Furthermore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect are executed.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include the invention related to the gaming machine (A) below. Conventionally, in gaming machines, it has been possible to perform performances using movable bodies that can be operated, as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2019-92949, and by moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display, There were some that made it possible to perform a performance similar to that of moving a movable body. However, in such gaming machines, there is a problem in that the pseudo-movable objects are simply moved and displayed in the same way as the movable objects, and it is not possible to increase the interest of the performance. There is a need to provide a gaming machine that can enhance the interest of the display.

The gaming machine described in means (A) is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
a movable body that is movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
a pseudo movable body display effect that moves and displays the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position;
a movable body effect that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position;
is executable,
It is better to perform the movable body performance and the pseudo movable body display performance in a predetermined period by the performance execution means, and to display the pseudo movable body without executing the movable body performance in the predetermined period. The ratio of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the body display performance is executed.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect are being executed.

Note that this invention may have only the matters specifying the invention stated in the claims of this invention, or it may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention stated in the claims of this invention. It may be something that you have.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a diagram showing an example of lighting of a game effect lamp. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of jackpot opening pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process during jackpot opening. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of various display processes. It is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big prize opening, the timing of various displays, etc. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a diagram showing an example of a state in which game balls are caught between special variable prize winning ball devices. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big prize opening, the timing of various displays, etc. 5 is a flowchart illustrating an example of various display processes. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation display in an image display device, the opening/closing state of a big prize opening, and the lighting state of various lamps. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect display. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a diagram showing the numerical range of the jackpot and the numerical range of the loss with the time saving in the variable display of the first special figure in the normal state or the time saving state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view showing a pachinko game machine as a characteristic part 241SG. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine as a characteristic part 241SG. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the relationship between variable display results and variation patterns. It is a diagram showing execution periods of various performances in normal reach and super reach. It is a diagram for explaining the content and structure of various performances in Super Reach. It is a diagram showing the jackpot expectation degree according to the execution status of the advanced presentation A and the advanced presentation B. It is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of the development flow of a pachinko gaming machine. (A) is a diagram showing a movement mode of the movable mounting body, and (B) is a diagram illustrating a situation in which the movable mounting body is lifted. (A) is a diagram showing a moving display mode of the first pseudo movable body display, and (B) is a diagram showing a moving mode of the first non-mounted movable body. (A) is a diagram showing a movement display mode of the second pseudo movable object display, and (B) is a diagram showing a movement mode of the second non-mounted movable body. (A) is a movable range of a mounted movable body, (B) is a diagram showing a movable display area of a first pseudo movable body display, and (C) is a diagram showing a movable display area of a second pseudo movable body display. (A) is a diagram showing a specific moving display area of the first pseudo movable body display, and (B) is a diagram showing a specific moving display area of the second pseudo movable body display. 3 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows preview performance type determination processing. (A) is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of preview performance A, and (B) is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of preview performance B. (A) is a flowchart showing advanced performance A type determination processing, and (B) is a diagram showing a table for determining advanced performance A type. (A) is a flowchart showing the advanced suggestion performance type determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing a table for determining the advanced suggestion performance type. (A) is a flowchart showing advanced performance B type determination processing, and (B) is a diagram showing a table for determining advanced performance B type. (A) is a flowchart showing a fixed performance type determination process, and (B) is a diagram showing a fixed performance type determination table. (A) to (H) are diagrams showing examples of performance operations mainly in normal reach of super reach β. (A) to (J) are diagrams mainly showing examples of performance operations in weak super reach. (A) to (F) are also diagrams showing examples of performance operations in weak super reach. (A) to (D) are diagrams mainly showing examples of performance operations in strong super reach. (E) to (J) are diagrams showing examples of performance operations of strong super reach performance. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing examples of production operations after notification of jackpot confirmation. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing details of movement display of the first pseudo movable body display. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the relationship between a light emitting display section and a mounted movable body LED. (A) to (F) are diagrams illustrating an example of performance operation of preview performance B in super reach γ. (A) to (F) are diagrams illustrating an example of performance operation of preview performance B in super reach γ. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for comparing a pseudo movable body display and a mounted movable body. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for comparing a pseudo movable body display and a mounted movable body. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for comparing a pseudo movable body display and a mounted movable body. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for comparing a pseudo movable body display and a mounted movable body. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for comparing a pseudo movable body display and a mounted movable body. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram for comparing a first pseudo movable body display and a second pseudo movable body display. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing a first modification of the characteristic portion 241SG. (A) to (H) are diagrams showing a second modification of the characteristic portion 241SG. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing a third modification of the characteristic portion 241SG.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. As shown, the frame lamp 9b includes a lower left lamp 9bL1 at the lower left portion, an upper left lamp 9bL2 at the upper left portion, a lower right lamp 9bR1 at the lower right portion, and an upper right lamp 9bR2 at the upper right portion. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2. Further, speaker lamps 9eL and 9eR are provided in the speaker portions 8L and 8R, respectively. A display device lower lamp 9f is provided below the image display device 5 on the game board 2, and the display device lower lamp 9f includes a left display device lower lamp 9fL and a right side display device lower lamp 9fR. There is. In addition, a general winning a prize opening vicinity lamp 9g is provided in the vicinity of the general winning a prize opening 10 provided at three locations on the lower left side of the gaming area.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1) that operates according to the performance. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, the display device lower lamp 9f, and the general prize opening vicinity lamp 9g are collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. There is. In addition, these main lamps 9a, frame lamps 9b, attacker lamps 9c, movable body lamps 9d, speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamps 9f, and general winning opening vicinity lamps 9g are configured to include LEDs.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). A batted ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided below the upper tray from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) and the number of prize balls that land in the grand prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 500A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 500A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 500A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 500Aa and a long piece 500Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passing gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is based on the timing at which a predetermined period of time (for example, 29.5 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, and the timing until the number of game balls that have entered the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls). This will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player. In the jackpot game state, a so-called right-handed hit may be performed in which the game ball is fired into the right-hand gaming area so that the game ball enters the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. It's okay.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 3, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

In the pachinko game machine 1, power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 through the power board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed after executing the recovery process (step S4). Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stoppage. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then setting change processing (step S7) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of game balls by operating the batting operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, and normal symbols are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled to stop displaying losing symbols or the like, or to display a display corresponding to a game stop state different from losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether predetermined setting change conditions are satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage). Turn off the light. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing down a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, then if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and step The setting change process in S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 and the setting confirmation process in step S5 are executed to enable control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. However, if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 is executed, but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of start winning that is set to be transmitted is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 7(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 7(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result judgment table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed as special symbols for "jackpot" than when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state (low probability state). assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a variable probability state in which probability variable control is performed, the probability that the jackpot gaming state will be determined is higher than when it is in a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. It gets expensive.

In the first special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and controlled to a small win gaming state is determined to be the same value, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. A value is assigned. In the second special figure display result determination table, the first special figure display result is the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and will be controlled in a small win game state, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned so that they are the same value but different from those in the judgment table. In addition, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state may be varied depending on the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability of determining that the special figure display result will be a "small win" and control to a small win game state may be set to be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is determined regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while setting value 2 to setting value 6 is assigned to "jackpot". In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values indicates that the jackpot will be won regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for judgment. When the setting value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to "jackpot", only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while on the other hand, setting value 2 to setting value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is set to It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is the set value, just as when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state. It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player. The gameplay may be changed depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the gameplay is such that the probability of winning in the variable state is looped at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type), When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and during the jackpot game, the game ball is While the game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to be a variable state based on passing through the switch, the gaming state (so-called V If the setting value set in pachinko machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, the small win probability is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time saving control). The game may be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 (so-called 1 type, 2 type mixed type). If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but the jackpot probability and small hit are higher than when these setting values are 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6). When changing the gameplay depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a production switch (to execute a predetermined production every time a game ball passes a predetermined area). switch), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the specified switch is used as a gaming switch (for controlling the gaming state to a variable probability state or a jackpot gaming state based on the game ball passing through the specified switch). It may also be used as a switch.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform initial operations of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return to the initial position, and control to perform predetermined operation checks.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 9, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state or a small win game state, if the command specifies the start of a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the setting content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 042AK)
Next, the gaming machine in the feature section 042AK of this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIGS. 10-1 to 10-21. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 042AK of the present embodiment starts displaying the number of won balls after a predetermined period after the attacker becomes open in the first round game, and if the attacker wins within the predetermined period. If there is no increase, a predetermined display is made to show that the number of earned balls has not increased, and if the attacker wins within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is made. The pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 042AK having such features will be described below. Note that the description of the same parts as those explained in the basic explanation above will be omitted.

FIG. 10-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d. , speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f (left side display device lower lamp 9fL, right side display device lower lamp 9fR), and general prize opening vicinity lamp 9g, which are lighting examples when all the game effect lamps 9 are turned on. It is a diagram. The characteristic parts 042AK of this embodiment, which will be described in detail later, include a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b (lower left lamp 9bL1, upper left lamp 9bL2, lower right lamp 9bR1, upper right lamp 9bR2), an attacker lamp 9c, and a movable lamp 9d. , speaker lamps 9eL, 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f (left side display device lower lamp 9fL, right side display device lower lamp 9fR), and general prize opening vicinity lamp 9g are lit sequentially from the lower left to the lower right. By doing so, it is possible to suggest to the player that he should play to the right.

FIG. 10-2 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of FIG. 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 10-2, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is on (step 042AKS001). At this time, if the jackpot flag is on (step 042AKS001; Yes), a performance waiting time at the start of the jackpot is set (step 042AKS002). For example, in the process of step 042 AKS002, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the performance waiting time at the start of the jackpot may be set in the game control process timer provided in the RAM 102.

Following the process of step 042AKS002, settings are made to send a winning start designation command from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 (step 042AKS003). For example, in the process of step 042 AKS003, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the winning start specifying command table prepared in advance for transmitting the winning start specifying command is stored in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer. It should be stored in . Thereafter, the jackpot flag is cleared and turned off (step 042AKS004). Also, settings are made to end the variable probability state and time saving state (step 042AKS005). For example, in step 042AKS005, processing to clear the probability variation flag and time saving flag to turn them off, processing to clear the special symbol variation number counter for counting the number of executions of the special symbol game in the probability variation state and time saving state, etc. It is enough if it is executed. Then, after updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "4" which is a value corresponding to the big winning opening pre-opening process (step 042 AKS006), the special symbol stop process is ended.

If the jackpot flag is off in step 042AKS001 (step 042AKS001; No), it is determined whether the small win flag is on (step 042AKS007). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step 042AKS007; No), a performance waiting time at the start of the small hit is set (step 042AKS008). For example, in the process of step 042AKS008, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the performance waiting time at the start of the small hit may be set in the game control process timer.

Following the process of step 042AKS008, similar to the process of step 042AKS003, settings are made to send a winning start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS009). Thereafter, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off (step 042AKS010). Then, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8" which is the value corresponding to the small hit release pre-processing (step 042AKS011).

Also, if the small hit flag is off in step 042AKS007 (step 042AKS007; No), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0", which is the value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 042AKS012). . After executing either of the processes in step 042AKS011 or step 042AKS012, it is determined whether or not to end the variable probability state or time saving state (step 042AKS013). For example, in the process of step 042AKS003, the value of the special figure variation counter (special figure variation count value) is updated by, for example, subtracting 1 or adding 1, so that the updated special figure variation count value becomes a predetermined value. A determination is made as to whether or not it matches the special gaming state end determination value. At this time, if it matches the special game state end determination value, the variable probability state and the time saving state may be ended and controlled to the normal state by clearing the variable probability flag and the time saving flag and turning them off. On the other hand, if it does not match the special game state end determination value, it is sufficient to maintain the state of the probability change flag and the time saving flag and terminate the process of step 042AKS013. After executing the end determination of such probability change state and time saving state, the special symbol stop processing ends. In addition, the end determination based on the count value of the number of special symbol variations may be performed only in the time saving state, and in the variable probability state, it may be continued until the next variable display result becomes a "jackpot". . Alternatively, for example, the variable state is terminated by extracting numerical data indicating a random value for determining the end of the variable state from a random counter provided in the RAM 102, and referring to a table for determining the end of the variable state stored in advance in the ROM 101, etc. Alternatively, a determination may be made as to whether or not to do so.

FIG. 10-3 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S114 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot release pre-process. In the jackpot opening preprocessing shown in FIG. 10-3, the CPU 103 first determines whether the jackpot start time flag is on (step 042AKS021). Here, the jackpot start time flag is set to the on state in response to the jackpot flag being on in the special symbol stop process of step S113 shown in FIG. If the jackpot start flag is on in step 042AKS021 (step 042AKS021; Yes), it is determined whether or not the jackpot start performance is on standby (step 042AKS022). As an example, in the special symbol stop process of step S113 shown in FIG. Set in the gaming control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S312, in response to the fact that the game control process timer value does not match the predetermined waiting time elapse determination value (for example, "0", etc.), it is determined that the jackpot start performance is on standby. , in response to a match, it may be determined that the jackpot start performance is not on standby.

If in step 042AKS022 the game is waiting for the performance at the start of the jackpot (step 042AKS022; Yes), for example, after updating the game control process timer value by subtracting 1 (step 042AKS023), the jackpot release pre-processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step 042AKS022 that the jackpot start time performance is not on standby (step 042AKS022; No), the jackpot start time flag is cleared (step 042AKS024), and the number of times the jackpot opening opening counter is cleared. (Step 042AKS025), reads the jackpot type buffer value stored in the RAM 102 (Step 042AKS026), and sets an opening control pattern corresponding to the jackpot type buffer value. In the feature section 042AK of the present embodiment, a common opening control pattern is set regardless of the jackpot type, but for example, if there is a jackpot type of "suddenly certain", a jackpot of "probable variation" or "non-probable variation" is set. It is only necessary to set an open control pattern different from the type. In addition, even if the jackpot type is "probable variable" or "non-probable variable," for example, different release control patterns are set for the jackpot types of "probable variable 1" and "probable variable 2." It may be set to a pattern.

After executing the process of step 042AKS026, it is determined whether or not the player is waiting until the big prize opening is opened in the next round (waiting for the next opening) (step 042AKS027). As an example, in the process of step 042AKS027, it is determined whether the game control process timer value matches the next release waiting end determination value, and if it does not match, it is determined that the next release is waiting. For example, it may be determined that the device is not waiting for the next release. If the game is waiting for the next release at step 042AKS027 (step 042AKS027; Yes), the process advances to step 042AKS023 to update the game control process timer value. The game control process timer value updated in step 042AKS023 is the time set as the waiting time at the start of the jackpot in step 042AKS002 shown in FIG. This is the time set as the interval time between each round.

If it is determined in step 042AKS027 that the next opening is not on standby (step 042AKS027; No), the grand prize opening is opened in accordance with the set opening control pattern and the count value in the grand prize opening number counter. Settings are made for this purpose (Step 042AKS028). As an example, in the process of step 042AKS028, a predetermined timer initial value corresponding to the opening time of the big winning hole is set in the game control process timer, so that the special variable winning ball device 7 forms a big winning prize. A grand prize opening time is set, which is the upper limit of the time for which the opening is kept open. In addition, for example, by starting outputting a solenoid drive signal to a predetermined large winning opening door solenoid via a predetermined solenoid circuit, the large winning opening door solenoid is turned on to open the large winning opening. Settings are made to set the status.

At this time, for example, regardless of whether the count value in the grand prize opening number counter is "1" to "15", the timer initial value corresponding to 29.5 seconds as the grand prize opening opening time is set by the game control process timer. is set to

Then, the CPU 103 performs settings for transmitting a large prize opening designation command to the performance control board 12 (step 042AKS029). After executing the process of step 042AKS029, the count value of the number of openings of the big winning opening is updated by adding 1 (step 042AKS030), and the value of the special drawing process flag is set to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process. After updating to 5'' (step 042AKS031), the pre-processing for opening the big prize opening ends.

FIG. 10-4 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S115 of FIG. 6 as the jackpot opening process. In the jackpot opening process shown in FIG. 10-4, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a game ball has entered the jackpot by, for example, determining whether the count switch 23 has been turned on. (Step 042AKS041). If the game ball does not enter the big prize opening in step 042AKS041 (step 042AKS041; No), the process proceeds to step 042AKS044.

On the other hand, if the game ball enters the grand prize opening at step 042AKS041 (step 042AKS041; Yes), the CPU 103 adds 1 to the winning number count value and updates it, and the game ball enters the grand prize opening. A setting is made to transmit a winning designation command indicating that a prize has been won from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (step 042AKS042). Then, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the updated number-of-winnings count value has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step 042AKS043). If the winning number count value does not reach the predetermined number (Step 042AKS043; No), after decrementing the game control process timer value by 1 and updating it (Step 042AKS044), for example, the game control process timer value corresponds to 29.5 seconds. It is determined whether 29.5 seconds have elapsed since the grand prize opening was opened, depending on whether or not the timer value has been met (step 042AKS045). At this time, if 29.5 seconds have not elapsed (step 042AKS045; No), the process during opening of the big winning hole is ended.

If it is determined in step 042AKS043 that the updated number of winnings count value has reached a predetermined number (step 042AKS043; Yes), or if 29.5 seconds have elapsed since the grand prize opening was opened in step 042AKS045. If it is determined that (Step 042 AKS043; Yes), for example, by stopping the output of the solenoid drive signal to the predetermined large winning hole door solenoid via a predetermined solenoid circuit, the large winning hole is closed. The solenoid for the big prize opening door is set to be turned off (step 042AKS046), and the winning prize count value is cleared (step 042AKS047).

After executing the process of step 042AKS047, settings are made to send a command after opening the big winning hole to the production control board 12 (step 042AKS048), and the value of the special drawing process flag is set after opening the big winning hole. After updating to "6" which is the value corresponding to the process (step 042AKS049), the jackpot opening process is ended.

In this way, the special symbol stopping process shown in Figure 10-2, the jackpot opening process shown in Figure 10-3, the jackpot opening process shown in Figure 10-4, etc. (including the jackpot opening process, jackpot end process, etc.) By being executed, the transmission setting of various production control commands such as a winning start designation command, a big winning hole opening designation command, a winning designation command, and a big winning hole after opening designation command is performed. Then, the command control process of step S27 in FIG. , grasps the timing such as the start of the jackpot, opening of the jackpot (start of round) and closing (end of round), entry into the jackpot, end of jackpot, etc.

FIG. 10-5 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing performed in the jackpot production processing of step S176 in FIG. 9 as various display processing. In the various display processes shown in FIG. 10-5, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a winning end designation command has been received (step 042AKS051). The winning end designation command is executed on the main board when it is determined in the jackpot release post-processing in step S116 in FIG. This is a command sent from the 11 side, and is a command for ending the jackpot performance and executing the ending performance.

If it is determined that the winning end designation command has not been received (step 042 AKS051; No), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether a predetermined period has elapsed since starting the nth R (nR predetermined period elapsed). Determination is made (step 042AKS052). Note that n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, and the initial value is set to "1" and is sequentially incremented by 1 in the process of step 042AKS066, which will be described later, and is cleared to "1" in step 042AKS068. The predetermined period is 0.6 seconds, and is set as a timer value at the start of the round game, and it may be determined that the predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the nRth round when the timer value becomes "0". More specifically, in response to the fact that the grand prize opening has become completely open (that is, it has been detected that the grand prize opening door has moved to a position where it is completely open), from the main board 11 side. A command for specifying that the big prize opening is open is transmitted, and counting of the timer value for a predetermined period may be started from the timing when the command is received.

In addition, in the characteristic part 042AK of the present embodiment, as will be described later, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the round game of the first round has started, the number of acquired balls display that is the display of the number of balls acquired and the round number that indicates the number of rounds is displayed. Display is performed. On the production control board 12 side, during the period from when a jackpot is reached to when it ends (period from fanfare to ending), each time a winning designation command indicating that a game ball has entered the jackpot is received, the number of wins is calculated. The process of adding 15 is continued. When the production control board 12 receives the winning designation command, it must first analyze the command, add up the number of wins, and display the added number of wins. It takes a predetermined period of time to display the information. Therefore, if the predetermined period is too short, the series of processing will not be completed in time for winnings from the start of the first round round game until the elapse of the predetermined period, and "0000" will be displayed as the number of wins. , even if a player has won a prize, the process of displaying "0015" may not be able to keep up ("0015" is displayed after "0000" is displayed, giving the player a sense of discomfort). Therefore, in the feature section 042AK of this embodiment, 0.6 seconds is set as the predetermined period, and if the game ball that is present at the top of the grand prize opening at the opening timing wins a prize from the opening until the number of rounds is displayed. In addition, a period is ensured in which "0015" is directly displayed instead of "0000" being displayed as the number of acquisitions. On the other hand, in the characteristic part 042AK of this embodiment, the predetermined period is set to 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval when firing continuously, and the period from firing until entering the big prize slot is set to 0.6 seconds. Even taking into consideration, the time interval required for the game balls that are continuously fired to enter the big winning hole is the firing interval. Therefore, the number of prizes entered into the grand prize opening will be one from when the grand prize opening is opened until the number of winnings is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the number of wins from increasing in the state before the number of wins or the number of rounds is displayed, causing the number of wins to be displayed at the timing when the number of rounds starts to be displayed, giving the player a sense of discomfort. can do. Although an example has been shown in which the predetermined period in the feature section 042AK of this embodiment is 0.6 seconds, which is the same as the firing interval, the predetermined period is not limited to 0.6 seconds and may be changed as appropriate.

If it is determined that the predetermined period has not elapsed since the start of the nth round (step 042AKS052; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether n=1, that is, whether it is the first round or not. Determination is made (step 042AKS053). n is a variable indicating the number of rounds, which is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and as described above, the initial value is set to "1", and is sequentially added by 1 in the process of step 042AKS066, and is set to "1" in step 042AKS068. cleared. In the process of step 042AKS053, it is determined whether n=1 by checking the value of n.

If it is determined that n=1 (step 042AKS053; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs a right-handed performance that suggests to the player that he should play right-handed, and also suggests that a jackpot gaming state has been reached. The operation of the fanfare performance is controlled (step 042AKS054). On the other hand, if it is determined that n≠1 (step 042AKS053; No), the production control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the n-1R and the number of acquisitions, and also displays the number of rounds corresponding to the n-1R. The operation of the jackpot performance is controlled (step 042AKS055). In the process of step 042AKS055, for example, when n=2, a round display indicating that it is the first round and the number of acquisitions are displayed, and the operation of the jackpot performance corresponding to the first round is controlled. In the process of step 042AKS055, as a jackpot performance, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9 is made to emit light in a pattern corresponding to the jackpot performance, and a predetermined music or sound is emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R. It is sufficient if a performance that outputs the following is performed. The light emitting pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the jackpot performance may be set in advance.

After executing the process of step 042AKS054 or step 042AKS055, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a winning designation command has been received, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the grand prize opening (step 042AKS056). In addition, in the process of step 042AKS056, winnings are determined for a predetermined period after starting the nR. If the winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS056; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends the various display processes.

When the winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning in the big winning opening within a predetermined period after starting the nth round (step 042AKS056; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 calculates the count value of the number of balls won. is added by "15" (step 042AKS057). Note that the count value of the number of acquired balls is stored in advance in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 with an initial value of "0", and "15" is added by the processing of step 042AKS057 and the processing of step 042AKS063 described later. The number of acquired balls is continuously counted during the so-called consecutive games, and is cleared to "0" at the timing when the time saving control ends without the variable display result becoming a "jackpot", that is, at the end of the consecutive games. . After executing the process of step 042AKS057, the performance control CPU 120 causes the attacker lamp 9c to emit light and outputs a winning sound corresponding to the winning (step 042AKS058). In addition, the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the process of step 042AKS058 (the same applies to step 042AKS064) is performed in a manner that is greater than the number of times of light emission per unit time of the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c that emit light during the jackpot performance, for example. It emits light in a manner that notifies you of what has happened. Therefore, it becomes easier to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and the game enjoyment can be improved. In addition, regarding the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c, the number of times of light emission per unit time may be greater during the winning time and during the jackpot performance. In addition, when a game ball wins in the big prize opening, the winning sound is output in addition to making the attacker lamp 9c emit light, regardless of whether the prize is won within a predetermined period or not. Therefore, it becomes easier to recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and the game enjoyment can be improved.

After executing the process of step 042AKS058, the production control CPU 120 determines whether n=1, that is, whether it is the first round (first R), similarly to step 042AKS053 (step 042AKS059 ). If n=1, that is, if it is the first round (step 042AKS059; Yes), the various display processes are ended. On the other hand, if n≠1, that is, if it is not the first round (step 042AKS059; No), the count value of the number of acquired balls added in step 042AKS057 is displayed (the number of acquired balls is displayed), and the number of acquired balls is displayed. After the updated display (step 042AKS060), various display processing ends. In addition, in the feature section 042AK of this embodiment, when performing the update display of the number of acquired balls in the process of step 042AKS060, instead of displaying the count value of the number of acquired balls added in step 042AKS057 as is, the count value of the number of acquired balls is displayed as shown in FIG. As shown in 12(a-23), a count-up display (display indicating that the number of acquisitions is increasing) is performed, and then the acquisition number is displayed. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the number of acquired balls will increase, and the player's interest in the game can be improved.

If it is determined in step 042AKS052 of FIG. 10-5 that a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the nth R (step 042AKS052; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the nth R and the number of acquisitions. At the same time, the operation control of the n-th jackpot performance is performed (step 042AKS061). When n=1, that is, when it is the first round, the number of rounds and the number of acquisitions are displayed for the first time in step 042AKS061. In this case, if there is a win before the predetermined period has elapsed, the number of wins is updated and displayed in step 042AKS061. Specifically, if a game ball enters the grand prize opening before the predetermined period of time has elapsed, the number of wins is incremented by 15 in step 042AKS057, so in step 042AKS061, ) As shown in Figure 10-11 (a-21), the number of wins has not increased in this jackpot after the count-up display (notification display that the number of wins has increased) is performed. Display the number of wins (display of "0015") that is different from the prescribed display (as a specific display) (if you are playing consecutive games, count the display of adding "15" to the number of wins from the previous jackpot) You can do this after uploading). On the other hand, if the game ball has not entered the jackpot before the predetermined period has elapsed, the number of winnings remains "0" and the number of winnings has not increased in the current jackpot, so the number of winnings remains "0" and the number of winnings does not increase in the current jackpot. -22), as a predetermined display, the number of wins is displayed (displaying "0000") to indicate that the number of wins has not increased (if you are playing consecutive games, the number of wins from the previous jackpot remains the same). display). In addition to "0000" as the acquisition number display (predetermined display) to indicate that the acquisition number has not increased, a non-numeric display such as "---" or "not increased" may be used. You can do it like this. Further, in step 042AKS061, as a jackpot performance, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, the game effect lamp 9 is made to emit light in a pattern according to the jackpot performance, and a predetermined music or sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R. It is sufficient if a performance that outputs the following is performed. The light emitting pattern of the game effect lamp 9 during the jackpot performance may be set in advance. In this way, during a predetermined period after the grand prize opening is opened, that is, in a situation where the number of wins is not displayed, the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the game ball enters the grand prize opening. However, in a situation where the number of acquisitions is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed, the effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-gaming machine frame 3 and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 may be switched alternately. The display effect lamps 9 are turned on to emit more light than during a predetermined period. Therefore, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest without giving the player a sense of anxiety. It is possible to liven up the performance and improve the interest in the game. Furthermore, since the performance effect lamp 9 is made to emit light at the same timing as the execution timing of the performance during the jackpot, the performance can be excited at once at the timing when the performance during the jackpot is executed, and the game interest can be improved.

After executing the process of step 042AKS061, the production control CPU 120 determines whether or not a winning designation command has been received, that is, whether or not a game ball has entered the grand prize opening (step 042AKS062). When the winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning in the big winning opening (step 042AKS062; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 adds "15" to the count value of the number of acquired balls (step 042AKS063), The attacker playing card 9c is made to emit light, and a winning sound corresponding to the winning is output, and a count-up display (display notifying that the winning number is increasing) is performed, and then the winning number update display is performed to display the winning number. (Step 042AKS064).

After executing the process of step 042AKS064, or if the winning designation command is not received in step 042AKS062 (step 042AKS062; No), the production control CPU 120 determines whether the n+1R, which is the next round after the nR, has started. It is determined whether or not (step 042AKS065). In step 042AKS065, the determination may be made based on, for example, whether or not a large prize opening designation command indicating the start of the n+1R has been received from the main board 11 side. If the (n+1)th R has not started, that is, if the grand prize opening designation command has not been received and the nth R remains (step 042 AKS065; No), the performance control CPU 120 ends the various display processes as is. . On the other hand, when the n+1st R starts, that is, when the big prize opening designation command indicating the start of the n+1R is received (step 042AKS065; Yes), n is added by "1" (step 042AKS066) and various display processing end. For example, if n=1, that is, the first round, n=2 in step 042AKS066. Note that although n=2 and this is the second round, until the predetermined period has elapsed, it is determined No in steps 042AKS052 and 053, and in step 042AKS055, it corresponds to the first round, which is the n-1R. A round display is performed, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a round display corresponding to the second round, which is the nR, is performed (displayed in the process of step 042AKS061 after determining Yes in step 042AKS052).

If it is determined in step 042AKS051 that the winning end designation command has been received (step 042AKS051; Yes), the performance control CPU 120 performs settings to end the jackpot performance corresponding to the round in order to perform the ending performance (step 042AKS051; Yes). 042AKS067), clears n to 1 (step 042AKS068), and ends various display processing.

Next, the display timing of displaying the number of rounds, displaying the number of acquisitions, etc. and examples of performance operations will be specifically explained with reference to FIGS. 10-6 to 10-14. In the illustrated example, the case is not during a consecutive game, but is a so-called first hit (first jackpot).

FIG. 10-6 is a timing chart showing the opening timing of the big prize opening, the timing of various displays, etc. FIGS. 10-7 to 10-14 are diagrams showing examples of performance operation displays, opening/closing states of the grand prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps on the image display device 5. As shown in FIGS. 10-6 and 10-7 (a-1), when the combination of decorative symbols constituting a jackpot is stopped and displayed, a jackpot game state is entered. At this stage, the grand prize opening is in a closed state as shown in FIG. 10-7 (b-1). In addition, in order to notify the player of the jackpot, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-1), a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c, a movable lamp 9d, a speaker lamp 9eL, Various performance effect lamps 9 such as 9eR, display device lower lamp 9f, and general winning a prize opening vicinity lamp 9g are turned on. In the illustrated example, the upper stage is a performance effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3, and the lower stage is a performance effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2.

When a jackpot is hit, as shown in Figure 10-6, a right-handed performance and a fanfare performance are performed to notify the player that they should play right-handed until the end of the predetermined period of the first round (Figure 10-6). 5, step 042AKS054). Note that the period from the jackpot to the start of the first round shown in FIG. 10-6 is a period that is sufficiently longer than the predetermined period. Specifically, first, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (a-2), a fanfare effect image is displayed on the image display device 5, and at the same time, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-2), All the production effect lamps 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, the effect lamps 9 are turned on in this order from the lower left side to the upper left side, the center part, the upper right side, and the lower right side, and a right-hand hitting effect is performed in which "hitting right" is displayed in a large size on the image display device. Note that the small right-hitting display displayed in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 shown in FIG. 10-7(a-2) may be continuously displayed during the jackpot game state.

Specifically, in the right-handed performance, as shown in FIGS. 10-7 (a-3) to 10-10 (a-19), the image display device 5 displays the "right-handed hit" superimposed on the fanfare image. The display continues. Therefore, the lighting order of the production effect lamps 9 will be explained below. When the right-handed performance starts, as shown in Figure 10-7 (c-3), the general winning hole vicinity lamp 9g provided at the lower left of the gaming area lights up first, and then the lamp 9g in the vicinity of the general winning hole lights up, as shown in Figure 10-7 (c-3). As shown in c-4), the lower left lamp 9bL1, which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower left portion, is lit. Next, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-5), among the display device lower lamps 9f provided below the image display device 5 on the game board 2, the left display device lower lamp 9fL lights up, and then As shown in Figure 10-7 (c-6), the upper left lamp 9bL2, which is the frame lamp 9 in the upper left part, lights up, and as shown in Figure 10-8 (c-7), the speaker lamp corresponding to the speaker 8L part lights up. 9eL lights up. In this way, the performance effect lamps 9 are lit in order from the lower left side to the upper left side of the pachinko game machine 1. Note that, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (b-7), since the grand prize opening is in a closed state, the ejected game media does not enter the grand prize opening at this stage. The example shown in FIG. 10-8 (b-7) shows an example in which the fired game ball passes through the second path in the upper part of the big prize opening door and is guided to the discharge path.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-8), the movable body lamp 9d corresponding to the movable body 32 provided in the upper center portion of the game board 2 lights up, and as shown in FIG. ), when the main lamp 9 above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3 lights up, the performance effect lamp 9 provided at the upper center of the pachinko gaming machine 1 lights up.

Next, as shown in Figure 10-8 (c-10), the speaker lamp 9eR corresponding to the speaker 8R part lights up, and then, as shown in Figure 10-8 (c-11), the frame lamp in the upper right part 9 lights up, and as shown in FIG. 10-8 (c-12), among the display device lower lamps 9f provided below the image display device 5 on the game board 2, the right display device Lower lamp 9fR lights up. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-13), the lower right lamp 9bR1, which is the frame lamp 9 in the lower right portion, lights up, and the attacker lamp 9c provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 lights up. do. In this way, the performance effect lamps 9 are lit in order from the upper right side to the lower right side of the pachinko game machine 1. As a result, the effect lamps 9 are lit in order from the lower left side to the upper left side, then to the center part, and then from the upper right side to the lower right side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the effect lamp 9 lights up the player's right hand. There will be a right-handed performance that suggests. In addition, in this example, an example was shown in which both the production effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 and the production effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 were used to suggest right-handed play. It may be. In addition, only the effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 lights up from the lower left side to the center to the lower right side, and only the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 lights up from the lower left side to the center and right side. Both may be turned on independently, at the same time or with a time difference, such as in the downward direction.

After the right-handed performance on the performance effect lamps 9 is completed, all the performance effect lamps 9 are turned off as shown in FIG. 10-9 (c-15). Note that, as shown in FIG. 10-9 (a-15), the right-hitting display on the image display device 5 continues to be performed (the right-hitting effect itself is being executed).

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-6, when the opening timing of the big winning hole comes, the 1st R is started, and the big winning hole is opened as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-16). At this stage, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (a-16), the right-handed display on the image display device 5 continues, and until a predetermined period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-16). As shown, all the production effect lamps 9 remain off (the same applies up to FIGS. 10-10 (a-19) and (c-19)). Even if all of the performance effect lamps 9 are not turned off, any one of the indicators such as luminous intensity, brightness, and illuminance may be set lower than usual. In addition, as shown in Figure 10-10 (b-16), even after the big prize opening is opened, until the predetermined period elapses, Figures 10-7 (c-3) to 10-9 As shown in (c-13), the effect lamps 9 may be lit in sequence to suggest right-handed hitting. In this case, the lighting speed of each production effect lamp may be made faster than before the opening of the grand prize opening (the lighting period may be shortened and the changing speed may be made faster). In addition, when the production effect lamps 9 are sequentially turned on after the big prize opening is opened to suggest a right-handed hit, after the attacker lamp 9c that is lit last is lit, as shown in Fig. 10-9 (c-15). It is also possible to leave the light on instead of turning it off. According to this, it is possible to make the player aware that the big prize opening is in the open state.

Then, when the grand prize opening is completely opened as shown in Figure 10-10 (b-17), a count of 0.6 seconds as a predetermined period corresponding to the 1st R is started, and as shown in Figure 10-10 As shown in (b-18), when a game ball enters the grand prize opening, the game ball is detected by the count switch 23, and a winning designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side. In addition, for game balls that are fired due to a right-handed performance before the 1st round starts (before the grand prize opening is open) (game balls that are hit quickly), the grand prize opening will be in the open state. If it exists above the big winning opening at the timing when , it becomes possible to win within the predetermined period corresponding to the 1st R. On the side of the production control board 12, the winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18) through the process of step 042AKS058 in FIG. 10-5, and the winning sound is output as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18). As shown in , the attacker lamp 9c lights up in a manner to notify that the player has won a prize. As described above, the attacker lamp 9c emits light in a manner that is greater than the number of times of light emission per unit time of the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c that emit light during a jackpot performance, for example. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), the fired game ball passes through the first route, which is the route in the direction of the big winning opening, and is guided to the winning route where the count switch 23 is provided. An example is shown below. The special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time required for the counting switch 23 to detect the game ball present at the door of the big winning opening is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball present at the top of the grand prize opening will be detected by the count switch 23 within a predetermined period after the opening of the grand prize opening, thereby reducing the player's interest in the game without making him feel anxious. It can be prevented.

As shown in Figure 10-10 (b-18), after the game ball enters the big winning hole, or after the game ball enters the grand prize slot as shown in Figure 10-10 (b-17), time elapses without winning, and as shown in Figure 10- 10(a-19), (b-19), and (c-19), when the predetermined period of time has passed, the round number display and jackpot effect corresponding to the 1st R will be displayed as shown in FIG. 10-6. Since it is the execution timing and the acquisition number display execution timing, the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 is executed.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-10 (b-18), if the game ball enters the big winning hole before the predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in Figure 10-11 (a-20), A round number display of "1R" indicating one round is displayed, and a count-up display is also performed. In addition, at the same timing as these displays, as a jackpot effect (first R effect), decorative symbols that make up the jackpot are displayed and "BOUNUS in progress" is displayed as shown in Figure 10-11 (a-20). , and characters are displayed. Note that the decorative patterns that make up the jackpot displayed as the jackpot performance (first R performance) and the display of "BOUNUS in progress" are not shown (the same applies to Figures 10-20, which will be described later). As shown in 10-21, it is displayed in a manner suggesting that the ball should be hit to the right. Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-21 (A-1), when a fanfare or a right-handed performance is performed and a predetermined period of time has passed after the big winning opening is opened, as shown in Figure 10-21 (A-1), as a jackpot performance, As shown in (A-2), the "7" symbol, which is a decorative symbol constituting the jackpot, is displayed facing forward, and is placed above "B" in the "BOUNUS" display. A star-shaped image is displayed. Next, as shown in Figure 10-21 (A-3), the "7" symbol, which is a decorative symbol that makes up the jackpot, is tilted toward the back right, and the "BOUNUS in progress" display changes to "7". A star-shaped image moves to the top of "O". Next, as shown in Figure 10-21 (A-4), the "7" symbol that constitutes the jackpot faces forward, and a star appears above the "N" in the "BOUNUS" display. Images of shapes shift. After that, as shown in Figure 10-21 (A-5), the "7" symbol, which is a decorative symbol constituting the jackpot, becomes tilted toward the back left, and the "U" of the "BOUNUS in progress" display appears. A star-shaped image moves to the top of ``. Then, as shown in Figure 10-21 (A-6), the "7" symbol, which is the decorative symbol that makes up the jackpot, faces forward again, and a star appears above the "S" in the "BOUNUS" display. The image of the shape shifts and returns to FIG. 10-21 (A-2). In this way, during the jackpot production, the decorative patterns that make up the jackpot move toward the back right, the front, and the back left, and a star-shaped image moves from the left character of the "BOUNUS" display to the right. By shifting the , it is suggested to the player that he should hit to the right. The motion display of decorative patterns that make up a jackpot and the transition display of star-shaped images are called effect displays.In addition to this, effect displays include, for example, a predetermined image rotating clockwise, or a character gradually changing. This includes indications such as turning to the right. That is, the effect display may be displayed in a manner that suggests right-handed hitting. According to this, the effect display suggests that the ball should be hit to the right, making it easier to recognize that the player should hit the ball to the right.

In addition, during the jackpot performance, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (c-20), the performance effect lamp 9 is lit according to a light emission pattern set in advance according to the jackpot performance. In this example, it is assumed that a light emitting pattern is set in which the effect lamp 9 provided on the gaming machine frame 3 and the effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are alternately turned on. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (a-21), "0015" is displayed as the acquisition number display. In this way, as shown in FIGS. 10-9 (c-16) to (c-19), the production effect lamp 9 is not emitted until the grand prize opening is in the open state and a predetermined period of time has elapsed. As shown in -11 (c-20) and (c-22), the production effect lamp 9 is made to emit light after the number of acquisitions after a predetermined period is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from playing prematurely and to promote the firing timing.

On the other hand, if a predetermined period of time passes without the game ball entering the grand prize opening, the count-up display will not be performed and the number of acquisitions will be displayed as "0000" as shown in Figure 10-11 (a-22). is displayed. In addition, the round number display of "1R" indicating that it is one round is displayed, and as a jackpot production (1st R production), decorative symbols that make up the jackpot are displayed, "BOUNUS in progress" is displayed, and The point that the character is displayed and the point that the effect lamp 9 is lit according to a preset light emission pattern according to the effect during the jackpot are common regardless of whether a prize is won or not.

Next, as time passes and as shown in Figure 10-12 (b-23), when the 10th game ball enters the grand prize opening in the 1st round, the upper limit to which the grand prize opening can be opened. period. In addition, in conjunction with the winning, the process of step 042AKS064 shown in Figure 10-5 is executed, a count-up display is performed as shown in Figure 10-12 (a-23), and the count-up display is performed as shown in Figure 10-12 (a-24). As shown in the figure, the number of acquisitions "0150" is displayed. In addition, with the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in Figure 10-12 (b-23), and in addition to the lighting of the performance effect lamp 9 corresponding to the jackpot performance, the winning sound is output as shown in Figure 10-12 (c-23). ), the attacker lamp 9c lights up in a manner to notify that the player has won a prize. In addition, regarding the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened, it is a sufficient period even if counted from the elapse of a predetermined period for 10 game balls to win a prize. Specifically, the upper limit period is 29.5 seconds after opening, and is 28.9 seconds even after the predetermined period has elapsed. Since the continuous firing interval is 0.6 seconds, this is a sufficient period for winning 10 prizes. Therefore, since sufficient time is guaranteed for winning a prize, it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

When the 10th game ball enters the grand prize opening in the 1R, the maximum period in which the grand prize opening can be opened is reached. It is controlled to be in a closed state. After that, until the 2nd R shown in FIG. 10-6 starts, the big prize opening is controlled to be completely closed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-25). On the other hand, until the predetermined period of the second R has elapsed (until the predetermined period has elapsed after n=2), the number of rounds corresponding to the first R is displayed as shown in Figure 10-12 (a-25). , the jackpot effect continues to be performed (the display of the number of wins is updated according to the winnings), and the effect lamp 9 corresponds to the jackpot effect as shown in Figure 10-12 (c-25). and lights up.

In addition, when the 10th game ball enters the grand prize opening in the 1st round and the upper limit period has elapsed, the grand prize opening is controlled to be closed, but at this time, the 11th game ball enters the grand prize opening. A so-called over-win may occur in which the player enters the grand prize opening after the 10th game ball. Even in the case of over-winning, a count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23), and the number of wins of "0165" may be displayed. In this case, after the count-up display and the number of acquisitions are displayed according to the 10th winning, the count-up display and the number of acquisitions corresponding to the over-win are displayed, but as shown in Figure 10-12 (b-25) As shown in , the count-up display and the number-of-wins display corresponding to the over-win are completed within the period from when the big winning opening is completely closed until before it becomes open state corresponding to the 2nd R. Therefore, it is easy for the player to recognize that an over-win has occurred in the first round, and it is possible to improve the player's interest in the game. In addition, since the update of the number of wins displayed in the opening corresponding to the first round does not overlap with the update of the number of wins displayed in the opening corresponding to the second round, it is difficult to determine which one is the winning number corresponding to the opening of the round. It becomes easier. Further, the winning sound corresponding to an over winning sound may be a sound different from a normal winning sound (over winning sound). In this case, if the count value exceeds the upper limit value of "10" and the winning is achieved, the over winning sound may be output. Further, the attacker lamp 9c may also be caused to emit light in a manner corresponding to an over-winning mode, unlike the light emission in a normal winning mode.

Then, in response to the second round, as shown in Figure 10-6, the big winning opening becomes open again, and as shown in Figure 10-13 (b-26), the big winning opening opens again. controlled to become In this case, it is determined Yes in step 042AKS065 of FIG. 10-5, that is, the big prize opening designation command indicating the start of the n+1R is received, and the process of 042AKS066 is executed, so that n=2. Become. At this stage, the process of step 042AKS055 in Figure 10-5 is executed, so as shown in Figures 10-13 (a-26) and (c-26), the jackpot effect and the number of rounds corresponding to the 1R are shown. A display is made (see also Figure 10-6).

Next, when the grand prize opening is completely opened and the game ball enters the grand prize opening as shown in Figure 10-13 (b-27), unlike in the first round, the step shown in Figure 10-5 is In the process of 042AKS060, a count-up display is performed as shown in FIG. 10-13 (a-27), and an acquired number of "0165" is displayed as shown in FIG. 10-13 (a-28). In addition, with the winning, a winning sound is output as shown in Figure 10-13 (b-27), and in addition to the lighting of the performance effect lamp 9 corresponding to the jackpot performance, the winning sound is output as shown in Figure 10-13 (c-27). ), the attacker lamp 9c lights up. In this way, in rounds other than the first round, even if the prize is won during the predetermined period, the number of wins is updated and displayed during the predetermined period. Then, when the predetermined period of the second round has elapsed, the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 is executed, so that the "2R ” is displayed, and a jackpot effect corresponding to the second round is executed. In this case, the number "1" in the round number display of "1R" which is the first round is changed to "2". That is, "R" has been displayed continuously since the first round. Moreover, the display of "1R" continues to be displayed until the second R predetermined period has elapsed. In addition, the feature section 042AK of this embodiment shows an example in which a common jackpot effect is executed regardless of the number of rounds (the same applies to lighting control of the effect lamp 9), but it is executed in each round. The presentation during the jackpot may be different. The same applies to lighting of the production effect lamp 9. In this way, since the grand prize opening is opened before the round number display indicating that it is the second round, the game ball of the player who has been firing continuously since the first round is released at an early stage. You can win a prize in the big prize opening. Therefore, in each round of a plurality of round games, it is possible to increase the possibility that successive game balls will win a prize in the big prize opening opened earlier than the round display.

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 10-13 (a-26), (b-26), and (c-26), the grand prize opening is controlled to open in response to the 2nd R, and as shown in Figure 10-13 (a-29). 10-14 (a-31 ), (b-31), and (c-31), the number of acquisitions obtained in the 1st R continues to be displayed. Thereafter, the same process is performed until the final round determined in advance, and when it is determined that the winning end designation command has been received in step 042AKS051 of FIG. 10-5, a jackpot performance corresponding to the round is performed to perform the ending performance. Configure settings to terminate. In this way, from the second round onward, if you do not win within the predetermined period, the number of wins displayed in the previous round will continue to be displayed, but if you win within the predetermined period, the number of wins displayed will continue to be displayed. , the number of acquired balls is added to the number of acquired balls displayed in the previous round and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize winnings in the big winning opening even in the second and subsequent rounds.

For example, in the final round, if the 10th game ball enters the grand prize hole and the upper limit period has elapsed, the grand prize hole is controlled to be closed, but at this time, the 11th game ball enters the grand prize hole. As shown in FIG. 10-15, the jackpot game state may end with the ball stuck in the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a). . In this case, the game ball will enter the big winning hole at the start of the 1st R (when the big winning hole corresponding to the 1st R is opened) in the case of the next jackpot, and during the predetermined period of the 1st R. A winning game ball occurs. In this case, as shown in Figure 10-10 (c-18), the attacker lamp 9c is turned on in a manner to notify that the prize has been won, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, as shown in Figure 10-11 (a-20) and As shown in (a-21), after performing a count-up display, "0015" may be displayed as the acquisition number display. In addition, in such a case, there is a possibility that the fired game ball will win an additional prize during the predetermined period (possibility that the second ball will win a prize), and in that case, after the predetermined period has elapsed, the game ball shown in Figure 10-11 ( As shown in a-20) and (a-21), after performing a count-up display, it is sufficient to display "0030" directly as the acquisition number display without displaying "0000" or "0015". According to this, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and increase the interest in the game.

As explained above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature part 042AK in this embodiment, the following effects can be achieved.

The performance control CPU 120 displays the number of wins in the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 after a predetermined period after the grand prize opening is opened and the first round is started. If the game ball does not enter the grand prize slot within a predetermined period after the first round has started, a predetermined display is made after the predetermined period to indicate that the number of wins has not increased, and If the game ball enters the big winning hole within a predetermined period after one round has started, the number of wins is displayed as a specific display different from the predetermined display after the predetermined period. According to this, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

In addition, if the game ball enters the grand prize opening within a predetermined period after the start of the first round, the production control CPU 120 directly specifies the winning number without displaying the number of wins of "0000" as a predetermined display. A display of the number of acquisitions of "0015" is displayed as a display. According to this, it is possible to prevent confusion from being caused to the players and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 performs a count-up display to notify that the number of wins will increase if the game ball enters the grand prize opening within a predetermined period after the first round has started. , displays the acquisition number display of "0015" as a specific display. According to this, it is possible to easily recognize that there is a winning and the number of wins increases.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 counts the timer value for a predetermined period from the timing of receiving the command for specifying the opening of the opening of the opening that is transmitted from the main board 11 in response to the opening of the opening of the opening. The number of acquisitions is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. According to this, since a predetermined period is suitably counted and a specific display is performed when a prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 allows the launched game balls to pass through the second route at the upper part of the grand prize opening door and guide them to the ejection path by keeping the grand prize opening door in a closed state. By opening the winning opening door, the fired game balls are guided to the big winning opening through a first route and detected by a count switch 23. The special variable winning ball device 7 is configured so that the time until the counting switch 23 detects the game ball present at the door of the big winning opening is 0.6 seconds or less, which is a predetermined period of time. . According to this, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball present at the top of the grand prize opening will be detected by the count switch 23 within a predetermined period after the opening of the grand prize opening, and the player can enjoy the game without feeling anxious. It is possible to prevent a decrease in

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-6, the performance control CPU 120 performs a right-handed hit as shown in FIG. By performing a performance, it is displayed to the player that he should hit the ball to the right. According to this, since the game area to be fired during a jackpot is suggested, the game method can be easily recognized and the game enjoyment can be improved.

The open state of the big winning opening means that the big winning opening is completely open, that is, the big winning opening door has moved to a completely open position, and the big winning opening door is completely open. In response to detecting that the main board 11 has moved to a completely open position, a command to designate the opening of the big prize opening is transmitted from the main board 11 side. According to this, since a predetermined period of time is counted after the grand prize opening is completely opened, it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

In addition, for game balls that are fired due to the right-handed performance before the 1st round starts (before the grand prize opening is open) (game balls that are hit quickly), the grand prize opening is in the open state. If there is a prize at the top of the big prize opening at the timing when Displays the number of acquisitions as a display. According to this, it is possible to prevent the game balls hit quickly from being wasted.

In addition, for example, in the final round, when the 10th game ball enters the grand prize opening and the upper limit period has elapsed, the grand prize opening is controlled to be closed, but at this time, when the 11th game ball enters the grand prize opening As shown in FIG. 10-15, the jackpot game state may end with the ball stuck in the special variable winning ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big winning door and the glass door frame 3a). . In this case, the game ball will enter the big winning hole at the start of the 1st R (when the big winning hole corresponding to the 1st R is opened) in the case of the next jackpot, and during the predetermined period of the 1st R. A game ball wins, and the performance control CPU 120 displays the number of wins as a specific display after the predetermined period has elapsed. According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied when an irregular event occurs.

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a fanfare performance that indicates that a jackpot game state has been entered until the big prize opening changes from a closed state to an open state. Then, after the big prize opening is opened and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the round number is displayed together with the winning number, and it is possible to execute a jackpot performance corresponding to the round game. According to this, it is possible to add variety to the performance and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), the production control CPU 120, if a game ball enters the grand prize opening during a predetermined period after the grand prize opening is opened, The attacker lamp 9c is turned on as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18). In addition, as shown in Figure 10-12 (b-23), even if a game ball enters the grand prize opening other than the predetermined period, the attacker lamp will appear as shown in Figure 10-12 (c-23). Turn on 9c. According to this, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest without giving players a sense of anxiety, and it is possible to visually recognize that a prize has been won within a predetermined period of time. It becomes easier.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the process of step 042AKS058 in FIG. The device emits light in a manner that is greater than the number of times the light is emitted per hour (a manner that notifies winnings). According to this, it becomes easier to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (b-18), the production control CPU 120, if a game ball enters the grand prize opening during a predetermined period after the grand prize opening becomes open, the production control CPU 120 controls the A winning sound corresponding to the winning is output. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (b-23), even if a game ball wins in the grand prize opening other than the predetermined period, a winning sound corresponding to the winning is outputted. According to this, it becomes easier to recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, for the rounds after the first round, the performance control CPU 120 displays the number of rounds corresponding to the round in the process of step 042AKS061 in FIG. 10-5 after a predetermined period after the start of the round. conduct. According to this, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety, and in each round of a plurality of round games, It is possible to increase the possibility of winning successive game balls into a big prize opening opened earlier than the round display.

In addition, when the second round and subsequent round games are played, if the game medium does not enter the big winning hole within a predetermined period after the big winning hole is opened, the performance control CPU 120 controls the As shown in 10-14 (a-31), when the winning number display that was displayed in the previous round game continues to be displayed, and the gaming medium enters the corresponding grand prize slot within the specified period. As shown in FIG. 10-14 (a-30), the number of acquired balls awarded corresponding to the winning is added and displayed from the acquired number displayed in the previous round game. According to this, it is possible to easily recognize winnings in the big prize opening even in the second round and onwards.

Further, even when an over-win occurs, for example, the performance control CPU 120 performs a count-up display as shown in FIG. 10-12 (a-23), and displays the number of wins of "0165". In this case, after the count-up display and the number of acquisitions are displayed according to the 10th winning, the count-up display and the number of acquisitions corresponding to the over-win are displayed, but as shown in Figure 10-12 (b-25) As shown in , the count-up display and the number-of-wins display corresponding to the over-win are completed within the period from when the big winning opening is completely closed until before it becomes open state corresponding to the 2nd R. According to this, since the update of the winning number display at the time of one opening does not overlap with the update of the winning number display at the next opening, it becomes easy to determine which opening corresponds to the winning.

In addition, during a predetermined period after the grand prize opening is opened, that is, in a situation where the number of wins is not displayed, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game as shown in FIG. 10-10 (c-18). Although the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the ball enters the big prize opening, in a situation where the number of wins is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed, for example, as in Figure 10-11 (c-20) and ( c-21), the production effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-gaming machine frame 3 and the production effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 are turned on alternately, and more The production effect lamp 9 emits light. According to this, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without making the player feel anxious, and the number of wins after the predetermined period is displayed. It is possible to enliven the performance that follows, and to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can execute the right-handed performance and the fanfare performance before the start of the first round, as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-3) to 10-9 (c-13) as shown in FIG. 10-7 (c-3) to FIG. 10-9 (c-13) to suggest a right-handed hit. For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-21), the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-gaming machine frame 3 and the performance effect provided on the game board 2 The lamps 9 are turned on alternately. According to this, it is possible to suggest right-handed hitting using the production effect lamp 9. In addition, when the production effect lamps 9 are sequentially turned on after the big prize opening is opened to suggest a right-handed hit, after the attacker lamp 9c that is lit last is lit, as shown in Fig. 10-9 (c-15). Instead of turning off the light, the light may be left on as is. According to this, it is possible to make the player aware that the grand prize opening is in the open state.

Furthermore, the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened is a sufficient period even if counted after the predetermined period has elapsed for 10 game balls to win. According to this, since sufficient time is guaranteed for winning a prize, it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 operates as shown in FIGS. 10-9 (c-16) to (c-19) until the grand prize opening is opened and a predetermined period of time has elapsed, that is, until the number of wins is displayed. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the performance effect lamp 9 is not turned on until the number of acquisitions is displayed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in Figures 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22). let According to this, it is possible to suppress the player from playing prematurely and to promote the firing timing.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the performance control CPU 120 causes the performance effect lamp 9 to emit light at the same timing as the execution timing of the jackpot performance after a predetermined period has elapsed. let According to this, the performance can be made more exciting at once at the timing when the performance during the jackpot is executed, and the game interest can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-21, at the timing when the number of wins is displayed, the production control CPU 120 displays an effect display that transitions and displays decorative symbols and star-shaped images that constitute a jackpot, suggesting a right-handed hit. Do it in a certain manner. According to this, the effect display suggests that the player should play to the right, making it easier for the player to recognize that the player should play to the right.

(Modified example of characteristic part 042AK)
In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 10-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), the production effect lamps 9 light up in order to suggest that you should hit the ball to the right. Although an example has been shown in which all the performance effect lamps 9 are turned off after the right-handed performance using the performance effect lamps 9 is completed, this is just one example. For example, after the states shown in FIGS. 10-9 (a-15), (b-15), and (c-15), the state shown in FIGS. As shown in FIG. 10-16 (c-16A), at the timing when the state shifts to the state shown in FIG. An attacker lamp 9c provided at the position may be turned on. According to this, it is possible to easily make the player visually recognize that the big prize opening is in the open state. Note that the attacker lamp 9c may continue to be lit until a predetermined period of time has elapsed or during the open period.

Further, in the above embodiment, when updating the round display from the first round to the second round, the number "1" in the round number display of "1R" which is the first round is changed to "2". , an example has been shown in which "R" is continuously displayed from the first round and "1R" is continuously displayed until the predetermined period of the second R has elapsed, but this is just an example. be. For example, as shown in Figure 10-17, at the end of the open state corresponding to the first round, that is, at the timing when the big prize opening becomes closed, the display of "1" of the display of "1R" is erased. , only "R" may be displayed. Then, "2" may be displayed at the timing when the second R predetermined period has elapsed, and a round display of "2R" indicating that it is the second round may be performed. The same applies to the second and subsequent rounds. According to this, it is possible to visually confirm the end of each round, and it is possible to add variety to the game.

In addition, in the above embodiment, an example was shown in which the number of winnings that becomes the upper limit period during which the big winning opening can be opened is 10 (the upper limit number of winnings is 10), but for example, if the upper limit winnings is 1, , it may be arranged so that if two pieces are won during a predetermined period before the round number is displayed, the winning is over. In this case, a sound different from the normal winning sound (over winning sound) may be output as the winning sound for over winning during the predetermined period, and the attacker lamp 9c may also be made to emit light in a manner indicating the occurrence of over winning. .

In addition, in the above embodiment, regarding the number of wins displayed, an example was shown in which winnings of game balls into the big winning hole are counted, but in addition to this, winnings into the general winning hole 10 during a jackpot are also counted. Good too. In addition, since right-handed hitting is performed during the jackpot, the general winning hole that wins the prize is the general winning hole 10 provided above the variable winning ball device 6B. FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing an example of various display processes in the case where winnings in the general winning hole 10 during a jackpot are also counted. Note that description of parts similar to those in FIG. 10-5 will be omitted.

In the various display processes shown in FIG. 10-18, if it is determined in step 042AKS056 that the winning designation command has not been received (step 042AKS056; No), the general winning prize indicating that the game ball has won in the general winning opening 10 is further shown. It is determined whether the specified command has been received (step 042AKS081). Then, when the general winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning in the general winning opening 10 (step 042AKS081; Yes), the production control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of balls acquired ( Step 042AKS082). After executing the process of step 042AKS082, or if the general winning designation command is not received, that is, if there is no winning in the general winning hole 10 (step 042AKS081; No), the process moves to step 042AKS059. In addition, with the winning to the general winning hole 10, a winning sound indicating that the game ball has won to the general winning hole 10 (a winning sound different from the winning sound when winning to the grand winning hole) may be output.

In addition, in the various display processes shown in FIG. 10-18, if it is determined in step 042 AKS062 that the winning designation command has not been received (step 042 AKS062; No), it is further shown that the game ball has won in the general winning opening 10. It is determined whether a general prize designation command has been received (step 042AKS083). Then, when the general winning designation command is received, that is, when there is a winning in the general winning opening 10 (step 042AKS083; Yes), the production control CPU 120 adds "3" to the count value of the number of balls won ( Step 042AKS083), and the number of acquisitions is updated and displayed (Step 042AKS085). When displaying the updated number of acquisitions in step 042AKS085, a count-up display (display indicating that the number of acquisitions has increased) is performed, and then the acquisition number is displayed. After executing the process of step 042AKS085, or if the general winning designation command is not received, that is, if there is no winning in the general winning hole 10 (step 042AKS083; No), the process moves to step 042AKS065. In addition, with the winning to the general winning hole 10, a winning sound indicating that the game ball has won to the general winning hole 10 (a winning sound different from the winning sound when winning to the grand winning hole) may be output.

Next, an example of the performance operation in the case where winnings in the general winning hole 10 are also counted will be explained with reference to FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20. FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20 are diagrams illustrating display examples of performance operations, opening/closing states of the grand prize opening, and lighting states of various lamps on the image display device 5. (a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17) shown in Figure 10-19 are ( Same as a-16), (b-16), (c-16), (a-17), (b-17), and (c-17). As shown in the figure, when the grand prize opening is opened, a count of 0.6 seconds as a predetermined period is started. When the game ball enters the general winning hole 10, the state shifts to the state shown in FIGS. 10-19 (a-18A), (b-18A), and (c-18A). Then, after the game ball enters the general winning hole 10 as shown in Figure 10-19 (b-18A), or from the state shown in Figure 10-19 (b-17), the game ball also enters the general winning hole 10. If time passes without any winnings in the winning slot 10, and a predetermined period of time passes as shown in Figures 10-19 (a-19A), (b-19A) and (c-19A), the game ball will be awarded a general prize. If a prize is won in the mouth 10, the state shifts to the states shown in Figures 10-20 (a-20A), (b-20A), and (c-20A), and as shown in Figure 10-20 (a-20A). , a round number display of "1R" indicating that it is the first round is performed, and a count-up display is also performed. Also, at the same timing as these displays, as a jackpot effect (first R effect), decorative symbols that make up the jackpot are displayed and "BOUNUS in progress" is displayed, as shown in Figure 10-20 (a-20A). , and characters are displayed. In the jackpot performance, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (c-20A), the performance effect lamp 9 lights up according to a light emission pattern preset according to the jackpot performance. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-20 (a-21A), "0003" is displayed as the acquisition number display.

On the other hand, if a predetermined period of time passes without a game ball entering the general winning hole 10, as shown in FIG. " is displayed. In addition, the round number display of "1R" indicating that it is one round is displayed, and as a jackpot production (1st R production), decorative symbols that make up the jackpot are displayed, "BOUNUS in progress" is displayed, and The point that the character is displayed and the point that the effect lamp 9 is lit according to a preset light emission pattern according to the effect during the jackpot are common regardless of whether a prize is won or not.

In this way, even if a game ball enters the general winning hole 10 during a predetermined period after the big winning hole is opened at the start of the first round, the predetermined prize After the period has elapsed, "0003" is displayed as the number of wins in response to winnings in the general winning hole 10. In addition, when no game ball enters the general winning hole 10 during the predetermined period, "0000" is displayed as a predetermined display indicating that no prize ball has been awarded. Therefore, since the number of winnings corresponding to the winnings is also displayed for game balls that have entered the general winning hole 10 during the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent players from feeling anxious.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 042AK)
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature part 042AK is:
A gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A display means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.);
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change between a first state where the game medium is easy to win and a second state where the game medium is impossible or difficult to win;
When controlled to be in the advantageous state, a control means that can execute a round game a plurality of times (for example, CPU 103 for playing round games, etc.);
The display means is
It is possible to display an award amount display regarding the award amount of the gaming value that is awarded due to the winning of the gaming medium in the variable winning means (for example, displaying the number of acquisitions),
When the first round game among the plurality of round games is played, the award amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, the number of wins is displayed after a predetermined period of time after the big prize opening is opened, etc.)
If the game medium does not win in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been given is displayed as the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the number of acquired (e.g. displaying "0000" as the display),
If the game medium wins within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the award amount display after the elapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display) ),
It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The display means displays the specific display without displaying the predetermined display (for example, displays "0015" instead of displaying "0000") when the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period. display, etc.),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent confusion among players and prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
When the game medium wins the variable winning means within the predetermined period, the display means performs a count-up display indicating that the gaming value is given, and then displays the value given as the specific display. Display according to the gaming value (for example, display "0015" after performing a count-up display to notify that the number of acquisitions will increase),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that there has been a winning and the number of wins has increased.

(4) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (3) above,
The display means starts displaying the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed after receiving a command indicating that the variable prize winning means has changed from the second state to the first state (for example, when the main board 11 Start counting the timer value for a predetermined period from the timing of receiving the big prize opening designation command sent from the side),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, since a predetermined period is suitably counted and a specific display is performed when a prize is won within the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

(5) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (4) above,
The variable winning means is configured to lead the game medium to the winning path by being in the first state (for example, by opening the big prize opening door, the variable winning means causes the fired game ball to pass through the first path). (for example, by closing the grand prize opening door, the ejected game ball is a detection means (for example, a count switch 23) that is formed in the winning route and detects winning of the game media. etc.) and,
The time from the path forming means to the detecting means for the game media is within the predetermined period (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 does not operate until the counting switch 23 detects the game ball present at the big winning opening door). (e.g., the time is configured so that it is less than a predetermined period of 0.6 seconds),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the possibility that the game ball present above the grand prize opening will be detected within a predetermined period of time after the grand prize opening is opened, and the game enjoyment can be improved without giving the player a sense of anxiety. The decline can be prevented.

(6) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (5) above,
After being controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means enters the first state, an operation promotion display is performed to encourage the player to perform the operation (for example, after the jackpot has been won, the jackpot may be in an open state). Until this happens, as shown in Figure 10-7 (a-3), by performing a right-handed effect, it is displayed to the player that he should play right-handed),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, since the operation to be performed during the advantageous state is suggested, the game method can be easily recognized and the game enjoyment can be improved.

(7) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (6) above,
The first state is a state in which the variable winning door included in the variable winning means is completely opened (for example, the open state of the big winning opening means that the big winning opening is completely opened, In other words, the big winning opening door has moved to a completely open position, and in response to detecting that the big winning opening door has moved to a completely open position, the main board 11 is activated. (e.g. a command is sent from the side to specify when the big prize opening is open),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, since the predetermined period is counted after the grand prize opening is completely opened, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety.

(8) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (7) above,
Before the first round game in the advantageous state is started, when the operation promotion display is performed and the ejected game medium enters the variable winning means, after the predetermined period has elapsed, the specified Display a display (for example, before the start of the 1st round, a game ball fired by a right-handed performance is able to win a prize at the timing when the grand prize opening is open, and a prize can be won within the predetermined period) (If you do so, the number of acquisitions will be displayed as a specific display after a certain period of time, etc.)
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent game media fired before a round game is started from being wasted.

(9) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (8) above,
In the last round game of the plurality of round games in the advantageous state, when the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state, the advantageous state is held with the game medium sandwiched between them. (For example, in the final round, the 11th game ball is caught in the special variable prize ball device 7 (more specifically, between the big prize door and the glass door frame 3a), as shown in FIG. 10-15. (e.g., the jackpot game state ends while the state is still the same),
In the first round game when the control is again controlled to the advantageous state, the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, so that the game medium in the sandwiched state wins a prize in the variable winning means. In this case, the specific display is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, when the next jackpot is achieved, the game ball enters the jackpot at the start of the 1st round, and after the predetermined period has elapsed, the specific display is the number of wins). display, etc.),
You can do it like this.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling dissatisfied when an irregular event occurs.

(10) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (9) above,
Until the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests that the variable winning means has been controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a big prize win). Until the mouth changes from the closed state to the open state, a fanfare effect indicating that a jackpot game state has been entered can be executed), and is executed at the same time as the display of the award amount display starts after the predetermined period has elapsed. It is possible to display a round game that allows you to identify the round game that is being played, and to perform an in-round performance that corresponds to the round game (for example, after the grand prize opening is opened and a predetermined period has elapsed, the number of rounds is displayed together with the number of wins). (e.g., it is possible to perform a jackpot performance compatible with round games),

According to such a configuration, it is possible to add variety to the performance and improve the interest in the game.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 043AK)
The feature section 042AK includes the following feature section 043AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature part 043AK is
A gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A display means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.);
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change between a first state where the game medium is easy to win and a second state where the game medium is impossible or difficult to win;
When controlled to be in the advantageous state, a control means that can execute a round game a plurality of times (for example, CPU 103 for playing round games, etc.);
The display means is
It is possible to display an award amount display regarding the award amount of the gaming value that is awarded due to the winning of the gaming medium in the variable winning means (for example, displaying the number of acquisitions),
When the first round game among the plurality of round games is played, the award amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, the number of wins is displayed after a predetermined period of time after the big prize opening is opened, etc.)
If the game medium does not win in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been given is displayed as the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the number of acquired (e.g. displaying "0000" as the display),
If the game medium wins within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the award amount display after the elapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the acquisition number display). ),
A light emitting means (for example, a production effect lamp 9, etc.),
Further comprising a light emission control means (for example, a performance control CPU 120, etc.) for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means determines whether the game medium has won a prize in the case where the game medium has won a prize in the variable prize winning means after the elapse of the predetermined period and when the game medium has won a prize in the variable prize winning means before the elapse of the predetermined period. Control the light emitting means with a light emitting pattern corresponding to (for example, when a game ball wins a prize in the big prize opening, the attacker lamp 9c is made to emit light regardless of whether or not the prize is won within a predetermined period),
It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety, and also when a prize is won within a predetermined period. becomes easier to see.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (such as an attacker lamp 9c) located near the variable winning means that emits light when a game medium is won in the variable winning means, and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means ( For example, a production effect lamp 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c),
When a game medium is won in the variable winning means, the specific light emitting means emits light more often than the predetermined light emitting means per unit time (for example, the light emission of the attacker lamp 9c in the process of step 042 AKS058 (step 042AKS064) in a manner that is greater than the number of times of illumination per unit time of the game effect lamps 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c that emit light during the jackpot performance (a manner that notifies that a prize has been won), etc.)
You can do it like this.

According to this configuration, it becomes easier to visually recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
Further comprising sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R, etc.),
The sound output means includes:
outputting a winning sound corresponding to winning when the gaming medium wins in the variable winning means;
The winning sound is output when the game medium enters the variable winning means after the predetermined period has elapsed, and when the game medium enters the variable winning means before the predetermined period elapses (for example, when the game medium enters the variable winning means into the grand prize opening). When a ball wins a prize, a winning sound is output regardless of whether the ball wins within a predetermined period of time, etc.)
You can do it like this.

According to this configuration, it becomes easier to recognize that the game ball has entered the grand prize opening, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

(Description of means related to characteristic part 044AK)
The feature section 042AK includes the following feature section 044AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature part 044AK is:
A gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A display means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.);
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change between a first state where the game medium is easy to win and a second state where the game medium is impossible or difficult to win;
When controlled to be in the advantageous state, a control means that can execute a round game a plurality of times (for example, CPU 103 for playing round games, etc.);
The display means is
It is possible to display an award amount display regarding the award amount of the gaming value that is awarded due to the winning of the gaming medium in the variable winning means (for example, displaying the number of acquisitions),
It is possible to display a round game display that allows identification of the round game being executed (for example, displaying the number of rounds),
When the first round game among the plurality of round games is played, after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, the award amount display and the first round game are displayed. display the round game display corresponding to the round game (for example, in the first round, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the big prize opening is opened, the number of rounds and the number of wins are displayed),
When the second or subsequent round game among the plurality of round games is played, the second or subsequent round game occurs after the predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. Displaying the round game display corresponding to the round game (for example, in the second round, after a predetermined period of time has passed after the big prize opening is opened, the number of rounds is displayed),
If the game medium does not win in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been given is displayed as the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the number of acquired (e.g. displaying "0000" as the display),
If the game medium wins within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the award amount display after the elapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the winning number display) ),
It is characterized by

According to this configuration, since a specific display is displayed when a prize is won within a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest without giving players a sense of anxiety, and also to , it is possible to increase the possibility that successive game balls will win a prize in the big prize opening opened earlier than the round display.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
When the second and subsequent round games are played, if the game medium does not enter the variable winning means within a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state; , Continue to display the award amount display that was displayed in the previous round game (for example, within a predetermined period after the big prize opening is opened when the second round and subsequent round games are played) If the game medium does not enter the grand prize slot, the winning number display that was displayed in the previous round game will continue to be displayed, as shown in Figure 10-14 (a-31), etc.)
When the second and subsequent round games are played, if the game medium enters the variable winning means within a predetermined period after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state; , from the award amount displayed in the previous round game, the award amount corresponding to the gaming value awarded in response to the winning is added and displayed (for example, if the game media is sold within a predetermined period) When a prize is won in the corresponding big prize slot, as shown in Figure 10-14 (a-30), the number of acquired balls that was displayed in the previous round game will be changed to the number of earned balls awarded corresponding to the prize. (such as adding and displaying numbers),
You can do it like this.

According to this configuration, it is possible to easily recognize winnings in the big winning hole even in the second and subsequent round games.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
The display means is capable of updating and displaying the award amount display that is being displayed in response to winning of the game medium in the variable winning means,
The updating display of the award amount display ends after the variable winning means changes from the first state to the second state and before it returns to the first state again (for example, when the grand prize opening is completely closed). (e.g., the count-up display and the number of wins corresponding to the over winnings are completed within the period from when the winnings are completed until the opening state corresponding to the 2nd R is reached),
You can do it like this.

According to this configuration, the update of the number of wins displayed at the time of one release does not overlap with the update of the number of wins displayed at the next release, making it easy to determine which release corresponds to the winning number. .

(Description of means related to characteristic part 045AK)
The feature section 042AK includes the following feature section 045AK.
(1) The gaming machine related to the feature part 045AK is:
A gaming machine (such as a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A display means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that instructs the display content on the image display device 5, etc.);
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change between a first state where the game medium is easy to win and a second state where the game medium is impossible or difficult to win;
When controlled to be in the advantageous state, a control means that can execute a round game a plurality of times (for example, CPU 103 for playing round games, etc.);
The display means is
It is possible to display an award amount display regarding the award amount of the gaming value that is awarded due to the winning of the gaming medium in the variable winning means (for example, displaying the number of acquisitions),
When the first round game among the plurality of round games is played, the award amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, the number of wins is displayed after a predetermined period of time after the big prize opening is opened, etc.)
If the game medium does not win in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been given is displayed as the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the number of acquired (e.g. displaying "0000" as the display),
If the game medium wins within the predetermined period, a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed as the award amount display after the elapse of the predetermined period (for example, "0015" is displayed as the acquisition number display). ),
A plurality of light emitting means (for example, a production effect lamp 9, etc.),
Further comprising a light emission control means (for example, a production control CPU 120, etc.) for controlling the light emission means,
The light emission control means is configured such that when the variable winning means is in the first state and the award amount display after the predetermined period is displayed, the variable winning means is in the first state. Control is performed to cause the light emitting means to emit more light than when the award amount display is not displayed before the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, during the predetermined period, that is, in a situation where the acquisition amount display is not being performed, the control shown in FIG. 10- As shown in 10 (c-18), although the attacker lamp 9c only lights up when the game ball enters the grand prize opening, in a situation where the number of wins is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed, For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-21), the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the multi-gaming machine frame 3 and the performance effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2. (e.g., lighting them alternately and emitting more light from the production effect lamps 9 than during a predetermined period),
It is characterized by

According to such a configuration, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety, and the number of wins after the predetermined period is displayed. It is possible to enliven the performance after the game is performed and improve the interest in the game.

(2) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
After being controlled to the advantageous state and before the variable winning means enters the first state, it is possible to display an operation promotion display that encourages the player to perform an operation (for example, a right-handed display is displayed);
The light emitting means includes a specific light emitting means (such as an attacker lamp 9c) located near the variable winning means that emits light when a game medium is won in the variable winning means, and a predetermined light emitting means other than the specific light emitting means ( For example, a production effect lamp 9 other than the attacker lamp 9c),
When the variable prize winning means is in the first state, when the award amount display is not displayed before the predetermined period has elapsed, the specific light emitting means is made to emit light, and the predetermined light emitting means is made to correspond to the operation promotion display. The specific light emitting means and the predetermined light emitting means are caused to emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the round game when the award amount display is displayed after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, when the big prize opening is After the release, until a predetermined period has elapsed, the production effect lamps 9 are sequentially lit as shown in FIGS. 10-7 (c-3) to 10-9 (c-13) to suggest a right-handed hit, After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, for example, as shown in FIGS. When the production effect lamps 9 are lit alternately and the production effect lamps 9 are sequentially lit after the big prize opening is opened to suggest a right-handed hit, after the last attacker lamp 9c is lit, the 10-9 (c-15), do not turn off the light, leave it on as is),
You can do it like this.

According to this configuration, it is possible to promote the operation using the predetermined light emitting means, and it is also possible to make the player aware that the variable prize winning means is in the first state.

(3) In the gaming machine described in (1) or (2) above,
In the round game, one round game ends when a specific number of game media win, and the game moves on to the next round game (for example, a grand prize opening is opened when 10 game balls win a prize). ),
The time from when the predetermined period elapses until the variable winning means enters the second state is sufficient time for the game medium to win the specified number of prizes (for example, regarding the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened) (For example, it is a sufficient period of time to count from the elapse of a predetermined period for 10 game balls to win a prize),
You can do it like this.

According to this configuration, sufficient time is ensured for winning a prize, so it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

(4) In the gaming machine described in (1) above,
In the round game, one round game ends when a specific number of game media win, and the game moves on to the next round game (for example, a grand prize opening is opened when 10 game balls win a prize). ),
The time from when the predetermined period elapses until the variable winning means enters the second state is sufficient time for the game medium to win the specified number of prizes (for example, regarding the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened) (For example, it is a sufficient period of time to count from the elapse of a predetermined period for 10 game balls to win a prize),
When the variable prize winning means is in the first state, when the award amount display before the predetermined period is not displayed, the light emission of the light emitting means is restricted, and the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed. 10-9 (c-16) to (c-19). ), the production effect lamp 9 is not emitted, and the production effect is started only after the number of acquisitions is displayed after a predetermined period of time, as shown in Figures 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22). (e.g., making the lamp 9 emit light),
You can do it like this.

According to this configuration, it is possible to suppress the player from playing prematurely and to promote the firing timing.

(5) In the gaming machine described in (4) above,
Until the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state after being controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to execute a suggestive effect that suggests that the variable winning means has been controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a fanfare effect). ), and at the same time as the display of the awarded amount starts to be displayed after the predetermined period of time has elapsed, a round game display that can identify the round game being executed and an in-round effect corresponding to the round game can be executed. (For example, displaying the number of rounds, displaying the number of wins, and displaying the jackpot effect after a predetermined period of time)
The light emitting means is caused to emit light at the same timing as the execution timing of the mid-round performance (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-11 (c-20) and (c-22), the same timing as the execution timing of the jackpot performance (e.g., to light up the production effect lamp 9),
You can do it like this.

According to this configuration, the performance can be made more exciting at once at the timing when the performance is executed during the round, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(6) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (5) above,
further comprising a general prize winning means (for example, general prize winning hole 10, etc.) in which game media can be won;
The display means is
The amount of gaming value awarded as a result of a game medium winning in the general winning means can be displayed as the awarded amount display (for example, in response to a winning in the general winning hole 10, a number of winnings display may be displayed). ),
If the game medium does not win in the general winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been given is displayed as the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, after the predetermined period has elapsed, If a game ball does not enter the general winning hole 10, "0000" is displayed as a predetermined display indicating that no prize ball has been awarded),
If the game medium enters the general winning means within the predetermined period, after the predetermined period has elapsed, a display corresponding to the fact that the game medium has entered the general winning means is displayed as the award amount display (for example, the grand prize opening is in an open state). If a game ball wins in the general winning hole 10 during the predetermined period after , "0003" will be displayed as the number of wins after the predetermined period has passed, corresponding to the winning in the general winning hole 10. ),
You can do it like this.

According to this configuration, since a display corresponding to winning in the general winning means is also displayed regarding winnings in the general winning means during the predetermined period, it is possible to prevent anxiety from being caused to the player.

(7) In the gaming machine described in any one of (1) to (6) above,
The variable winning means is provided in a predetermined area in the gaming area (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the gaming area on the right side),
The display means is
A first image (for example, a decorative pattern constituting a jackpot) can be displayed at the same timing as the award amount display,
The first image is displayed with an effect at the same timing as the award amount display during the advantageous state (for example, an effect display that moves a decorative pattern constituting a jackpot),
The effect display is displayed in a manner that suggests the predetermined area (for example, as an effect display, a decorative pattern constituting a jackpot is moved toward the back right, the front, and the back left, and is displayed in a manner that suggests a right-handed hit. Such),
You can do it like this.

According to this configuration, the game area where the shot should be fired is suggested by the effect display, making it easier for the player to recognize the game area where the shot should be fired.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition, the specific configuration is included in the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiments and other embodiments described below, even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the present invention.

Further, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modification example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment example and each modification example described below may be combined arbitrarily.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiments and the later-described embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and should not be considered restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description and the following description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims are included.

The gaming machine of the present invention is also a gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.
A display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that instructs display content to the image display device 5, etc.);
A variable winning means (for example, a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) that can change between a first state where the game medium is easy to win and a second state where the game medium is impossible or difficult to win;
When controlled to be in the advantageous state, a control means that can execute a round game a plurality of times (for example, CPU 103 for playing round games, etc.);
The display means is
It is possible to display an award amount display regarding the award amount of the gaming value that is awarded due to the winning of the gaming medium in the variable winning means (for example, displaying the number of acquisitions),
When the first round game among the plurality of round games is played, the award amount display is displayed after a predetermined period of time after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state. (For example, in the first round, the number of wins is displayed after a predetermined period of time after the big prize opening is opened, etc.)
If the game medium does not win in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that the gaming value has not been given is displayed as the award amount display after the predetermined period has elapsed (for example, the number of acquired (e.g. displaying "0000" as the display),
If the game medium wins the variable prize winning means within the predetermined period, a count-up display indicating that the gaming value has been given is performed, and then, according to the gaming value given as the specific display, (For example, a count-up display is performed to notify that the number of acquisitions will increase, and then "0015" is displayed.)
moreover,
a movable body that is movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
a pseudo movable body display effect that moves and displays the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position;
a movable body effect that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position;
is executable,
It is better to perform the movable body performance and the pseudo movable body display performance in a predetermined period by the performance execution means, and to display the pseudo movable body without executing the movable body performance in the predetermined period. An example is a gaming machine that is controlled to the advantageous state at a higher rate than when the body display performance is executed.

According to such a configuration, since a specific display is performed when a prize is won within a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game without giving the player a sense of anxiety. Furthermore, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect are executed.

In other words, after a predetermined period has passed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, a predetermined display will be displayed as the award amount display (if no prize is won within the predetermined period) or a special display (if the prize is not won within the predetermined period) ) is displayed, the amount to be awarded can be suitably displayed to prevent a decline in game interest, and the player can also know that the movable body effect will be executed when the pseudo movable body display effect is executed. Since the audience will look forward to the performance and pay attention to it, the interest of the performance can be improved. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that, when installed in a gaming parlor, easily attracts players' interest and improves the interest of the performance.

Further, the amount display and the movable body may be associated with each other. For example, the movable body may be operated when a specific award amount (such as 5,000 shots or 10,000 balls as the number of acquired balls) is provided as the award amount display. By doing so, it becomes possible to further improve interest.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can more suitably execute a group effect and draw the player's attention to the fact that a movable body effect and a pseudo movable body display effect are executed, A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to
Display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
a movable body that is movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
a pseudo movable body display effect that moves and displays the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position;
a movable body effect that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position;
is executable,
It is better to perform the movable body performance and the pseudo movable body display performance in a predetermined period by the performance execution means, and to display the pseudo movable body without executing the movable body performance in the predetermined period. An example is a gaming machine that is controlled to the advantageous state at a higher rate than when the body display performance is executed. An example of the form of this gaming machine will be explained below as another example of the form.

(Other form examples)

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A mode for implementing a gaming machine according to the present invention will be explained below based on the drawings.

(Characteristic part 241SG form)
Type 1 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing games,
Display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo movable body display on the image display device 5) (a part that can be displayed by moving Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position);
A movable body that is movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position (for example, a mounted movable body 32 that is movable from an origin position to a production position);
Equipped with
The direction in which the pseudo movable body display moves and displays from the first display position to the second display position and the direction in which the movable body moves from the first position to the second position are the same direction ( For example, the direction in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position are the same downward direction),
The movement of the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is faster than the movement of the movable body from the first position to the second position (for example, the first pseudo The movement amount L2 of the movable object display Z100 per unit time TL2 is larger than the movement amount L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable object 32 (see FIG. 14-37),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to perform an impactful performance that is faster than the movement of the movable body by displaying the pseudo movable body, thereby surprising the player.

Type 2 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing games,
Equipped with a display means capable of displaying a pseudo movable body display (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 can display the first pseudo movable body display Z100 on the image display device 5),
The pseudo movable body display causes a reaction movement of a predetermined amount of movement when it moves from a first position (for example, a first origin position) to a second position (for example, a first presentation position) different from the first position. It is a display imitating a movable body (for example, the first non-mounted movable body M100) to be carried out,
The display means can move and display the pseudo movable body display from a first display position corresponding to the first position to a second display position corresponding to the second position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 On the display device 5, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can be displayed moving in the vertical direction between a first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and a first effect display position corresponding to the first effect position. some part),
The pseudo-movable body display displays a reaction movement of a specific amount of movement when moved from the first display position to the second display position (for example, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100). (a part that displays a reaction action (bounce display) of a predetermined movement amount when moving and displaying from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and stopping and displaying at the first effect display position),
The specific movement amount is larger than the predetermined movement amount (for example, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position). The movement amount L12 of the reaction action display is larger than the movement amount L13 of the first reaction action display performed when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves and displays from the first origin position to the first presentation position. (see Figure 14-38),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by displaying a pseudo-movable object, it is possible to simulate the same effect as a movable object without installing a movable object, and it is also possible to simulate the reaction that occurs when the movable object moves to the second position. By displaying the motion in an exaggerated manner, it is possible to provide a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

Type 3 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo movable body display on the image display device 5) (a part that can be displayed by moving Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position);
A movable body that is movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position (for example, a mounted movable body 32 that is movable from the origin position to the production position);
A performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the performance,
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
A pseudo movable body display effect that moves and displays the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position (for example, the effect control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the second display position). (portion that can be moved and displayed in one direction display position),
a movable body performance that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 can move the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position);
is executable,
It is better to perform the movable body performance and the pseudo movable body display performance in a predetermined period by the performance execution means, and to display the pseudo movable body without executing the movable body performance in the predetermined period. The rate of control to the advantageous state is higher than when the body display performance is executed (for example, during the variable display period of the symbol based on the variation pattern of super reach β or super reach γ, development using the mounted movable body 32 When the performance A and the developed performance B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are executed, the control is made into a jackpot game state than when the developed performance B is executed without the developed performance A being executed. (expectation of jackpot) is high (see Figure 14-11),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect are being executed.

Type 4 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the performance control CPU 120 displays a second pseudo movable body display on the image display device 5). (a part that can be displayed by moving the Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position);
A performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the performance,
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
A special suggestion performance that suggests that the pseudo movable body display will be controlled to the advantageous state by displaying the pseudo movable object display (for example, a preview performance A that foretells the possibility (expectation level) that the variable display result will be a jackpot);
A notification performance that notifies players of content that is advantageous to the player (for example, development performance B that notifies that the game will develop into a strong super reach performance);
A predetermined effect (for example, development effect B) that is executed before the notification effect and indicates that the notification effect is to be executed by displaying a notification-related image (for example, character image Z310) related to the notification effect. development suggestion that suggests the possibility of implementation), and
is executable,
In the predetermined effect, the pseudo movable body display is displayed in one of a plurality of modes (for example, patterns PS-1 to PS1-4) in which the degree of expectation for the notification effect to be executed differs;
The display means is
In the special suggestion effect, the pseudo movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, and then moved and displayed from the second display position to the first display position, and then hidden ( (See Figures 14-25 (C) to (F)),
In the predetermined effect, after displaying the pseudo movable object display at the second display position, the pseudo movable body display is hidden without moving from the second display position to the first display position (Fig. 14-26 (A ) to (J), see Figure 14-27 (A)),
Before executing the notification effect and when hiding the pseudo movable body display displayed at the second display position, the notification related image (for example, Character image Z310) can be displayed (see FIGS. 14-26(F) to (J), FIG. 14-27(A)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the special suggestion performance, the pseudo-movable object display moves in the same way as the movable object as a structure, so attention is paid to whether it can be controlled to an advantageous state without giving the player a sense of discomfort. On the other hand, in the predetermined effect, the pseudo movable object display prioritizes the display of the notification-related image over moving and displaying it in the same way as the movable object, without returning from the second display position to the first display position. Since it is not displayed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the suggestion of execution of the notification effect.

Type 5 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the performance control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to a first initial display) (a part that can be moved and displayed from the position to the first effect display position, a part that can be displayed by moving the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position on the image display device 5) ,
A performance execution means (for example, performance control CPU 120) capable of executing the performance,
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
a special performance that notifies that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a decision performance that notifies whether or not the game will be controlled to the jackpot gaming state);
A specific performance that suggests that the special performance will be executed before the special performance is executed (for example, a development performance B that notifies that the final performance will be executed after developing into a strong super reach performance);
is executable,
The display means is
The pseudo movable body display can be displayed in a moving manner in the specific performance and the special performance,
When moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display in the specific performance, after moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, the display moves from the second display position to the first display. The image is hidden without being moved to the position and displayed, and a suggestive image suggesting execution of the special effect (for example, the mode at the start of display of the reach title image Z51) is displayed in the display area including the second display position. It is possible (see Figure 14-27 (B) (D) to (F)),
When moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display in the special performance, after moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, the display moves from the second display position to the first display. move to a certain position and display it, then hide it (see Figures 14-30 (A) to (F)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, before the special effect is executed, the pseudo movable object display prioritizes the display of the suggestive image over moving and displaying it in the same way as a movable object as a structure, and moves from the second display position to Since it is hidden without returning to the 1 display position, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the suggestion that the special effect is to be executed. On the other hand, in the special effect, the pseudo movable object display is displayed moving in the same way as the movable object. , it is possible to draw attention to the information that is advantageous to the player without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Form 6 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing games,
A display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, the performance control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to a first initial display) (a part that can be moved and displayed from the position to the first production display position),
The display means is
moving and displaying the pseudo movable object display from the first display position to the second display position via an intermediate display position (for example, a first intermediate display position);
The movement display of the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is performed in the order of the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position for each display frame (Fig. 14-40 (A) to (C)),
In a display area including the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position, a specific image that emphasizes the moving display of the pseudo movable body display (for example, an image where glass is cracked and shows a plurality of glass shards) It is possible to display an effect image Z71) in which Z71A is scattered (see Figure 14-31),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the pseudo movable object display can be displayed moving quickly without reducing visibility, and by emphasizing the moving display with a specific image, it is possible to give a favorable impression of the moving display to the player. can.

Type 7 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Display means capable of displaying a pseudo movable body display including a first pseudo movable body display and a second pseudo movable body display different from the first pseudo movable body display (for example, the performance control CPU 120 Moving the display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and moving the second pseudo movable object display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position on the image display device 5. (a movable and displayable part),
The first pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (see FIG. 14-16(B)),
The second pseudo movable object display can be moved and displayed from a first predetermined display position to a second predetermined display position different from the first predetermined display position (see FIG. 14-16(C));
The display means is
The first pseudo movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position via an intermediate display position (for example, a first intermediate display position) (see FIGS. 14-40 (A) to (C)). ),
A movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is performed in the order of the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position for each display frame. (See Figures 14-40 (A) to (C)),
Display of movement of the first pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position; and Display of movement of the second pseudo movable body display from the first predetermined display position to the second predetermined display position. (For example, the movement display from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position is faster than the movement display from the first specific initial display position of the second pseudo movable body display Z200.) faster than the movement display from to the first specific effect display position (see Figure 14-40),
When the first pseudo movable object display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, and when the second pseudo movable object display is moved from the first predetermined display position to the second predetermined display position. The rate at which the advantageous state is controlled differs depending on when it is displayed (for example, in preview performance B, a pattern in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first performance display position) When PBY-3 or the pattern PBY-4 that is moved and displayed from the second initial display position to the second effect display position is executed, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moves from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect. The rate at which the jackpot gaming state is controlled (jackpot expectation level) differs depending on when the pattern PBY-1 that is moved and displayed at the display position or the pattern PBY-2 that is moved and displayed at the second specific effect display position is executed. (See Figure 14-10, Figure 14-20 (B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which one of the first pseudo movable body display and the second pseudo movable body display is displayed in a moving manner, and the first pseudo movable body display has a different ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state. The player can recognize the movable body display and the second pseudo movable body display by the difference in speed of the moving display.

The gaming machine of Form 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 7,
A movable body (for example, a first non-mounted movable body M100) that is movable from a first position (for example, a first origin position) to a second position (for example, a first production position) different from the first position;
When the movable body is moved from the first position to the second position, a reaction movement of a certain amount of movement is performed (see FIG. 14-36);
When the pseudo movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, a reaction movement display of a specific movement amount is performed (see FIG. 14-36);
The specific amount of movement is larger than the certain amount of movement (for example, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position). The movement amount L12 of the reaction action display is larger than the movement amount L13 of the first reaction action display performed when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves and displays from the first origin position to the first presentation position. (see Figure 14-38),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by displaying a pseudo-movable object, it is possible to simulate the same effect as a movable object without installing a movable object, and it is also possible to simulate the reaction that occurs when the movable object moves to the second position. By displaying the motion in an exaggerated manner, it is possible to provide a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

The gaming machine of Form 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 8,
A movable body (for example, a mounted movable body 32) that can be moved from a first position (for example, the origin position) to a second position (for example, a production position) different from the first position,
The distance from the first display position to the second display position (e.g. movement display distance L2) is longer than the distance from the first position to the second position (e.g. movement distance L1) (Fig. 14-16),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the pseudo movable object display has a faster moving speed and a longer moving distance than the movable object, it is possible to provide a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

The gaming machine of Form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 9,
The pseudo movable body display includes a performance display section (for example, performance display section Z100A, Z200A) and a mechanism display section (for example, mechanism display section Z100B, Z200B),
In the moving display of the pseudo movable body display, the mechanism display section reaches the second display position before the effect display section (see FIGS. 14-36 (B1) and (B2));
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the pseudo movable object display can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

The gaming machine of Form 11 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 10,
The movement display of the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is faster than the movement display from the second display position to the first display position (for example, the movement display of the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the first display position is faster) The amount of movement L2 of the body display Z100 per unit time TL2 is larger than the amount of movement L1A of the mounted movable body 32 per unit time TL2 (see FIG. 14-37),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the pseudo movable object display can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

The gaming machine of Form 12 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 11,
The movement period of the movable body between the first position and the second position includes a first period in which the speed increases and a second period in which the speed decreases (Fig. 14-39 (A )reference),
The moving display period of the pseudo movable object display does not include the first period and the second period (see FIG. 14-39(B));
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the moving display of the pseudo movable object display can be performed more smoothly than the movement of the movable object.

The gaming machine of Form 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 12,
The pseudo movable object display includes a light emitting display section (for example, light emitting display sections Z108A, Z208A to Z208E),
The display means is capable of displaying the light-emitting display section by emitting light when the pseudo-movable object display is moved to the second display position (the effect control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 to the first display position). After moving to the production position and displaying it, the part that executes the light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the light emission display of the light emission display part Z108A at almost the same cycle (see Fig. 14-31 (D)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the pseudo movable object display moved to the second display position.

The gaming machine of Form 14 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 13,
The pseudo movable object display includes a light emitting display section (for example, light emitting display sections Z108A, Z208A to Z208E),
The display means does not display the light emitting display section when moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display (see FIG. 14-31);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by not highlighting the (incomplete) pseudo-movable object display during the moving display, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the presentation effect.

The gaming machine of Form 15 is the gaming machine described in Form 13 or Form 14,
The movable body includes a light emitting part (for example, a light emitting display part Z108A, Z208A to Z208E) capable of emitting light,
When the pseudo movable object display is moved to the second display position, the display means performs a light emission display of the light emission display section in a manner common to the light emission of the light emission section (the effect control CPU 120 After moving and displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect position, the part where the light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the light emission display of the light emission display section Z108A are executed at almost the same cycle.See Figure 14-31 (D). ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the pseudo movable object display can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

The gaming machine of Form 16 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 17,
The display means can move and display the pseudo movable body display from a first special display position to a second special display position different from the first special display position (for example, the performance control CPU 120 (portion where the body display Z200 can be moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position or the second specific effect display position),
a direction in which the pseudo movable body display moves and displays from the first display position to the second display position; a direction in which the pseudo movable body display moves and displays from the first special display position to the second special display position; are different directions (for example, the downward direction in which the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position in the preview performance A, and the downward direction in which the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the second pseudo movable object display Z200 in the preview performance A), and This is different from the right direction in which the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position (see FIG. 14-33),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since one pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed from a plurality of display positions, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance that is difficult to realize with a movable body.

The gaming machine of Form 17 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 16,
The display means moves and displays the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, and then moves the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position in a direction different from the direction in which it is moved and displayed. Can be displayed movingly (see Figure 14-43),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to provide players with unexpected performances that are difficult to achieve with movable objects.

FIG. 11 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 11(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 11(B) shows a configuration example of the first special symbol display result determination table used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 11(A), when the variable special figure is the first special figure, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is in the range of 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "time saving". Other numerical ranges are assigned as "outliers". In addition, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is variable probability, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Assigned. In addition, the case where the setting value of the first variable special figure is 2 to 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 11(A).

As shown in FIG. 11(B), when the variable special figure is the second special figure, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is in the range of 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "time saving". Other numerical ranges are assigned as "outliers". In addition, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is variable probability, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Assigned. Incidentally, the case where the set value of the second variable special figure is 2 to 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 11(B).

Here, if we pay attention to the numerical range of the hit judgment value assigned to "Jackpot" and "Time-saving loss" in each display result judgment table, as shown in Fig. 12, when the gaming state is normal state or time-saving state In the first special figure display result determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the common hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 is selected. Only numbers within the numerical range (1020-1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values. Numbers within the range are assigned a "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

Furthermore, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range from 65317 to 65535 among the winning determination values determines whether the time-saving win or loss occurs regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the time saving judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and there is also a time saving function. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65535, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time saver (loss reference value with time saver), in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) of the setting value 6. This setting prevents the numerical range of the time saving loss judgment value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value which changes according to each set value.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674.

In other words, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is variable probability state, when the set value is 1, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", but if the set value is 2 or more, the jackpot judgment value within the range of the common numerical value range plus the non-common numerical range A numerical value is assigned to a “jackpot.” Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1347 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numerical range.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in this pachinko game machine 1, when the setting value is 1 in the second special symbol display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the hit judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values is assigned. Numerical values within the range plus the non-common numerical value range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

Furthermore, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range from 65317 to 65425 among the winning determination values determines whether the time-saving win or loss occurs regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the time saving judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and there is also a time saving function. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65425, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time saver (loss reference value with time saver), in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) of the setting value 6. This setting prevents the numerical range of the time saving loss judgment value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is the common numerical value of the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The range is set. The characteristics of the other second special figure display result determination table are the same as the first special figure display result determination table.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, regardless of the setting value, 65317 to When the range of 65535 is set to the common numerical range with and without time saving, and the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the setting value will be changed in both the normal state and the time saving state. Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as a common numerical range with and without time saving. In other words, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state is set, the rate at which the variable display result is a loss with time-saving is the same for all setting values, so depending on the setting value, the gambling can be prevented from becoming excessively high. Furthermore, regarding the time saving error, which is assigned a common judgment value number for each setting value, all setting values are set in a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the reference value for the time saving error, so the display is variable. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU 103 related to determining whether the result is a time saving or not.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the settable setting values are six from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. . Furthermore, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 9 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 13, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes any of the following processes of steps S170 to S90175, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the mounted movable body 32 , outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 to output audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R, and commands to the lamp control board 14 (illumination signal) Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as lighting/extinguishing/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state. Then, when receiving a production control command specifying to start a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4". In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, the display result in the special figure game is determined to be a "loss", and the presentation process flag is flagged. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The jackpot performance process in step S90174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S90175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 241SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the characteristic part 241SG in this embodiment will be explained based on FIGS. 14-1 to 14-40. In addition, in the following, detailed explanations will be omitted by assigning the same reference numerals to the configurations that are similar to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation, or have different shapes, arrangement positions, etc., but have similar functions. Mainly the points that are different from the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 14-1, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the characteristic part 241SG, the mounted movable body 32 is formed to be slightly larger than the mounted movable body 32 shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 14-2, a vibration motor 61 built in the stick controller 31A is connected to the effect control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 vibrates the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. is considered possible. Further, a button LED 62 built in the push button 31B is connected to the lamp control board 14, and the production control CPU 120 can turn on/off the button LED 62.

FIG. 14-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the performance control command used in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 14-3(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 14-3(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. The variable display result specification command determines whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is a "miss", "big hit", or "small hit", as shown in Figure 14-3 (B), for example. Different EXT data is set depending on the result (predetermined result) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be selected when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result).

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 14-3 (B), command 8C00H is the first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". . Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "uncertain variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command that notifies a predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small win."

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which neither time saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a command in which time saving control is performed. This is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which probability variable control is performed but time saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, probability variable state without time saving), and command 9503H is a command 9503H for time saving control and probability variable. This command is a fourth gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming states (high probability high base state, time saving variable probability state) which are both controlled.

Command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) that is transmitted when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started. The command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) that is transmitted when the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restarted after being temporarily stopped. When power supply to the game machine is started, the game control microcomputer 100 sends a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, sends an initialization designation command. Send commands.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game or a small win game. Command A1XXH is a big winning hole opening notification command that notifies that the big winning hole is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or a small winning.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command while the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, for example, in response to the number of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") in the normal open jackpot state and the high speed open jackpot state, which will be described later, Different EXT data is set.

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command D100 is a customer waiting demonstration designation command for specifying execution of a customer waiting demonstration performance, and as described later, is executed when neither the first pending memory nor the second pending memory exists in the special symbol normal processing. This command is sent based on the demo display settings, and the customer waiting demonstration performance is executed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the customer waiting demonstration designation command was sent.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 14-3 (A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or these commands may not be included. You may add a command different from the one in . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times the probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 14-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 14-4, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, and a random number MR3 for determining the regular figure display result. Numerical data representing each of the random numbers MR4 is controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. As described later, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting section set in the RAM 102, to update various numerical data by software. Numerical data representing part of the random numbers MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control a variable display result such as a special pattern in a special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", or "non-probable variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". This is a random number value used to determine the value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to " Takes a value in the range of ``997''.

The random number MR4 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "3" to "13".

FIG. 14-5(A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, in order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result into a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" based on the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. This is the referenced table.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this embodiment, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether or not the special figure display result is treated as a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot gaming state. This is judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this embodiment, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), there are more decision values than when the gaming state is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "Jackpot". As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/300 in this embodiment), the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled becomes higher (approximately 1/300 in this embodiment). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the gaming state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a variable probability state (high probability state), it is determined that the control is to be made into a jackpot gaming state compared to when it is in a normal state or a time saving state. In order to increase the probability of winning, the determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

Further, FIG. 14-5(B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result whether or not to control the variable display result to a "small win" game state as a "small win". This is the table referenced for this purpose. In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this embodiment, regardless of whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether to control the special figure display result to a "small hit" game state as a "small hit". This is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result judgment table 2 in this embodiment, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" is different depending on the case of the first special figure special figure game and the case of the second special figure game. There is. Specifically, if it is a special game of the first special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but if it is a special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value has been assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the time saving control is executed to generate the second starting winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. In the high base state where winnings occur and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, "small hits" almost never occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter a prize opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which many game balls cannot be obtained, thereby preventing the game interest from decreasing.

FIG. 14-6(A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this embodiment is configured to select one of a plurality of jackpot types based on a random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled. This is a table that is referenced to determine the In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which a variable display (fluctuating display) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A). 2 special pattern display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot A", or " They are assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C."

Here, the jackpot types in this embodiment will be explained using FIG. 14-6(B). In this embodiment, the jackpot types include high-accuracy control and time-saving control after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "Probability variable jackpot B" which are executed and move to a high-precision high base state, and a high-probability low base state in which high-precision control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot gaming state ends. A "probable variable jackpot C" that transitions, and a "non-probable variable jackpot" that transitions to a low-probability-high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state where only the time saving control is executed are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probable variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state of "Probable Variable Jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds). . In addition, the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). . Therefore, the "probable variable jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10 round (10R) variable probability jackpot, and the "probable variable jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5 round (5R) variable variable jackpot. Furthermore, in the jackpot game based on "Probable Variable Jackpot C", a round in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player is repeated twice (so-called 2 rounds), and a special This is a high-speed opening jackpot in which the opening period of the variable winning ball device 7 is shorter (for example, 0.1 seconds) than other jackpot games. Furthermore, during the jackpot game of any jackpot type, probability change control and time saving control are not executed.

Also, although not particularly shown, the small winning game state in this embodiment changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state advantageous to the player, and the opening time is the same as that of the variable jackpot C. This is the open period (0.1 seconds in this embodiment). Furthermore, after the small winning game ends, the gaming state immediately before the small winning game is carried over.

In other words, in this embodiment, if it is determined to be a "probable variable jackpot C" or "small win", a variable display is executed with the same variation pattern (PC1-1 shown in Figure 14-7). At the same time, as a variable display result, the chance number is displayed in a stopped state, and furthermore, the opening patterns of the special variable winning ball device 7 are the same, so from these variable displays and the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7, , since it is not possible to distinguish whether it is a "probable variable jackpot C" in which the variable probability control is executed or a "small hit" in which the previous gaming state is continued without the variable probability control being executed, After the end of a jackpot game or a small win game, it is possible to allow the player to continue playing the game while making him/her expect that probability change control is being executed.

The high probability control and time saving control that are executed after the end of the jackpot game state of the probability variable jackpot A and the probability variable jackpot B are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is a variable probability jackpot A or variable probability jackpot B, the high probability control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so the jackpot gaming state does not go through the normal state. This occurs continuously, resulting in a so-called consecutive home situation.

On the other hand, the time saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" is such that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), or the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment). The game ends by entering a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 14-6(A), depending on whether the variably displayed special symbol is the first special symbol or the second special symbol, "probable variable jackpot A", " The assignment of determination values to the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", and "non-probable variable jackpot" is different. In other words, when the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "Probable Variable Jacket B" with a small number of rounds. If the variablely displayed special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". It has not been done. With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first starting condition for starting the special pattern game using the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 4A. and when the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fulfillment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special pattern game using the second special pattern, the jackpot type is not determined to be controlled to a normal open jackpot state or a high speed open jackpot state with a small number of rounds, such as "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". Therefore, for example, by high opening control accompanying time saving control, in a gaming state where game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state where few prize balls are obtained can be avoided. This makes it possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 14-6 (A), the assignment of the judgment value to the jackpot type of "non-probable variation" is determined by whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is the same, the probability of a non-probable jackpot and the probability of a fixed jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as mentioned above, depending on the fact that the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the allocation of the judgment value for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first or second special map game, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" with a large number of rounds, It is set so that it is easier to decide if it is a special figure game of a special figure than if it is a special figure game of the first special figure.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range that is different from the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is the jackpot of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". It may be possible to assign it to a type. For example, in the case of a special pattern game with the second special pattern, the judgment value is smaller than in the case of a special pattern game with the first special pattern, for the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether it is a first special figure game or a second special figure game.

FIG. 14-6 shows the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", respectively. A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small win." In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similarly to the super reach variation pattern, normal reach variation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. are provided. A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided, and in this case, the jackpot expectation level (jackpot reliability) of each normal reach variation pattern of normal reach α, normal reach β, . . . may be different. Further, although super reach α and super reach β are provided as super reach variation patterns, the present invention is not limited to this, and the super reach variation pattern may be of only one type, similar to the normal reach variation putter.

Incidentally, the fluctuation patterns in this embodiment include a special winning fluctuation pattern (corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "small hit" or the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C"). PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 14-7, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach effect in this embodiment is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern. Also, among the super reach variation patterns, for the super reach β and super reach γ variation patterns, the variable display period is longer (60 seconds) than the variable display period (50 seconds) of the super reach α variation pattern. has been done.

In addition, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the types of these fluctuation patterns are determined first, such as non-reach types, normal reach types, super reach types, etc. After that, instead of determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from among the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, the fluctuation pattern is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern may be provided, and from these random numbers for determining the type of variation pattern. The type of variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 14-8 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variable pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the gaming state, the display result of the variable display to be executed, and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (A), when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot in the normal gaming state (low base state), the jackpot variation pattern determination table A is selected and the corresponding Using fluctuation pattern determination table A for jackpot, change the fluctuation patterns into PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-3 (super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern). Determine from. In addition, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot A or a probability variable jackpot B in the normal gaming state (low base state), select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table B to change the variable display result. The pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot variation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot variation pattern), and PB1-3 (super reach β jackpot variation pattern).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-8 (A), in the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, the number of determination values assigned to PB1-1, PB1-2, and PB1-3 is It's different. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, 497 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, 300 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, and 200 determination values are assigned to PB1-3. Assigned. On the other hand, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, 250 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, 347 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, and 400 determination values are assigned to PB1-3. ing. In other words, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot A or a probability variable jackpot B, the variation pattern is determined to be a super reach at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-probability variable jackpot. In addition, since super reach β is easier to determine than super reach α, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a definite variable jackpot C or a small hit, select the special winning variation pattern judgment table, and use the special winning variation pattern judgment table to change the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special winning variation pattern). In other words, in this embodiment, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern depending on whether the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot C or a small win. It is difficult to specify whether the result is a variable jackpot C or a small hit.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Loss" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 2 or less, select the variation pattern determination table A for losses, and select the corresponding variation pattern judgment table A. Using variation pattern determination table A for misses, change the variation patterns to PA1-1 (non-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach variation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α variation pattern), and PA2 -3 (variation pattern of super reach β deviation).

Specifically, in the error variation pattern determination table A, 600 determination values are assigned to PA1-1, 300 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 90 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. Seven determination values are assigned to PA2-3.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 3, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table B for the loss, and Using variation pattern determination table B, change the variation patterns to PA1-2 (shortened variation pattern with non-reach deviance), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach deviance), PA2-2 (variation pattern with super reach α deviation), and PA2 -3 (variation pattern of super reach β deviation).

Specifically, in the variation pattern determination table B for failure, 700 determination values are assigned to PA1-2, 200 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 90 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. Seven determination values are assigned to PA2-3.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 4, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss, and select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss. Using the variation pattern determination table C, change the variation patterns to PA1-3 (shortened variation pattern with non-reach deviance), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach deviance), PA2-2 (variation pattern with super reach α deviation), and PA2 -3 (variation pattern of super reach β deviation).

Specifically, in the error variation pattern determination table C, 800 determination values are assigned to PA1-3, 100 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 90 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. Seven determination values are assigned to PA2-3.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is "off", the special figure variable display time is changed from the normal one based on the number of reserved memory of the variable special figure being 3, 4, etc. The rate at which variable display is executed is higher with shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3) that are shorter than non-reach variation patterns (PA1-1), thus preventing games from becoming too long. At the same time, it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-8(B), if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot in the high base state, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. PB1-1 (Normal Reach Jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (Super Reach α Jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (Super Reach β Jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (Super Reach γ Jackpot fluctuation pattern). Jackpot fluctuation pattern). In addition, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot A or probability variable jackpot B in the low base state, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and change the variation pattern to PB1-1 using the jackpot variation pattern determination table B. Determined from (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach β jackpot), and PB1-4 (variation pattern of super reach γ jackpot) .

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-8(B), in the jackpot variation pattern judgment table A and the jackpot variation pattern judgment table B, the judgment values for PB1-1, PB1-2, PB1-3, and PB1-4 are The number of allocations is different. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, 97 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, 350 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, and 300 determination values are assigned to PB1-3. 250 judgment values are allocated to PB1-4. On the other hand, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, 50 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, 200 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, and 347 determination values are assigned to PB1-3. , 400 judgment values are assigned to PB1-4. In other words, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is a variable probability jackpot A or a variable probability jackpot B, the variation pattern is higher than that of super reach β or super reach γ at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot. Since the variation pattern is easier to determine, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variation pattern in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a definite variable jackpot C or a small hit, select the special winning variation pattern judgment table, and use the special winning variation pattern judgment table to change the variation pattern to PC1-1 (special winning variation pattern). In other words, in this embodiment, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern depending on whether the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot C or a small win. It is difficult to specify whether the result is a variable jackpot C or a small hit.

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for failure, and change the fluctuation pattern to PA1-4 using the fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure. (Non-reach deviation pattern for time saving), PA2-1 (Normal reach deviation pattern), PA2-2 (Super reach α deviation pattern), PA2-3 (Super reach β deviation pattern), and PA2 -4 (super reach γ deviation variation pattern).

Specifically, in the variation pattern determination table D for failure, 800 determination values are assigned to PA1-4, 100 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 80 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. Ten determination values are assigned to PA2-3, and seven determination values are assigned to PA2-4.

In other words, in this embodiment, if the variable display result is "off" in the high base state (time saving state), based on the time saving state, the special figure variable display time will change compared to the normal non-reach Since the variable display is executed more frequently with the shorter variable pattern (PA1-4) than the pattern (PA1-1), the variable display results are It is possible to shorten the time it takes to hit the jackpot. Note that the fluctuation patterns PA2-4 and PB1-4 (super reach γ) are fluctuation patterns that can only be executed in the high base state (time saving state).

The RAM 102 in this embodiment is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of games in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area includes, for example, a first special figure reservation storage section, a second special figure reservation storage section, a regular figure reservation storage section, a game control flag setting section, a game control timer setting section, and a game control timer setting section. It includes a control counter setting section and a game control buffer setting section.

The first special figure holding storage unit stores special figures that have not yet been started, although a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of the game (special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure holding storage unit associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the holding number, and the first starting condition is satisfied when the game ball passes (enters). The CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination as pending data. , are stored until the number of stored items reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). In this way, the suspension data stored in the first special figure suspension storage section indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game is suspended. ) is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot.

The second special figure holding storage unit stores special figures that have not yet been started, although the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of a figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the holding number, and the second starting condition is satisfied when the game ball passes (enters). The CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 etc. based on the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination as pending data. , are stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (eg, "4"). In this way, the suspension data stored in the second special figure suspension storage section indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display result) in this special figure game is suspended. ) is the pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not it will be a jackpot.

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting winning may be stored in a common reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. In this case, starting hole data indicating whether the game ball passed through (entered) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The standard figure holding storage section stores the hold information of the standard figure game which has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the normal figure holding storage unit associates the game balls with the holding numbers in the order in which they pass through the passage gate 41, and stores the normal figure display result judgment data extracted from the random number circuit 104 by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game balls. The numerical data indicating the random number MR4 of is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting section stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting section may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting section, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and are periodically counted according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. Numerical data indicating each random value is updated periodically or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting section is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting section stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 14-2 is provided with a performance control data holding area as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. This performance control data holding area includes a performance control flag setting section, a performance control timer setting section, a performance control counter setting section, and a performance control buffer setting section.

The effect control flag setting section includes a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the display state of the effect image on the screen of the image display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the production control flag setting section stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The effect control timer setting section is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations, such as display operations of effect images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting section stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control counter setting section stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting section is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting section stores data indicating buffer values for each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this embodiment, the buffer number 1-0 corresponds to the variable display being executed by the pending storage of the first special figure, and the buffer number 1-1 to buffer number 1 corresponds to the pending memory 1 to 4 of the first special figure. -4, Buffer number 2-0 corresponding to the variable display being executed due to the pending memory of the second special figure, Buffer number 2-1 to buffer number 2-4 corresponding to the pending memory 1 to 4 of the second special figure The data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer is set up with entries that can store data such as starting opening winning designation command, symbol designation command, variable category command, pending storage number notification command, etc. in association with each of them. It is stored in a predetermined area of the production control buffer setting section. When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designation command, variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a pending storage number notification command (a first pending storage number notification command or a second pending storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The four commands that make up one set, the starting opening prize designation command, the symbol specification command, the fluctuation category specification command, and the pending storage number notification command, are the buffer numbers corresponding to the starting opening winning prize specification command and the pending storage number notification command. is stored in the entry.

The storage contents of the storage areas (entries) corresponding to buffer numbers 1-0 to 1-4 corresponding to the first special figure will be stored in the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1") when the start condition is satisfied. ), the contents of the buffer number ``1-0'' that stores the contents of the suspended memory for which the start condition is met are shifted upward one by one as described later. , is cleared in the special figure waiting process executed when the variable display ends. Similarly, the storage contents of the storage areas (entries) corresponding to buffer numbers 2-0 to 1-4 corresponding to the second special figure will be stored in the highest pending storage (buffer number "2") when the start condition is met. -1"), the buffer number "2-0" is shifted upward one by one as will be described later, and the buffer number "2-0" is shifted upward one by one as will be described later. The stored contents are cleared in a special figure waiting process executed when the variable display ends.

At the time of starting winning into the first starting winning opening, the performance control CPU 120 sends a command to the beginning of an empty entry among buffer numbers 1-1 to 1-4 of the receiving command buffer (the lowest buffer number). When a starting prize is entered into the second starting winning slot, the starting winnings are stored starting from the beginning of the empty entry among buffer numbers 2-1 to 2-4 (the entry with the lowest buffer number). . At the time of starting winning, the starting opening winning specifying command to the pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Therefore, when the command is received, the starting opening winning prize designation command is stored in the storage areas corresponding to the suffixes "1" to "4" of the buffer numbers corresponding to the first special figure pending memory or the second special figure pending memory. , symbol designation command, fluctuation category designation command, and pending storage number notification command are stored in this order.

The command stored in the command buffer received at the time of starting winning is an entry (buffer number "1-0" or "2- The data stored in the buffer number "1-1" or "2-1" is deleted and stored in the entry corresponding to the pending storage of the variable display to be started (the entry corresponding to the buffer number "1-1" or "2-1"). The stored contents of the entries subsequent to the pending storage of the variable display to be started are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative symbols in the first special symbol pending memory is finished, each command stored in buffer number "1-0" is deleted and stored in buffer number "1-1". Each command stored in the area corresponding to the buffer number "1-2" is shifted to the area corresponding to the buffer number "1-1". The commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "1-3" and "1-4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "1-2" and "1-3". be done. Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes an area (entry) for storing each command related to pending storage that is variably displayed at that time.

(Production during super reach)
Here, the performance during super reach will be explained based on FIG. 14-9. FIG. 14-9 is a diagram showing execution periods of various effects in normal reach and super reach.

As shown in FIG. 14-9, in the variable display of decorative symbols based on the normal reach variation pattern or the super reach variation pattern, after starting the variable display, the performance control CPU 120 changes the variable display mode to the normal reach display mode. Based on this, a normal reach effect is performed as a variable display effect. In addition, in the super reach variation pattern, after executing the normal reach effect, a super reach effect (weak super reach effect or strong super reach effect) is performed as a variable display effect based on the variable display mode being set to the super reach effect. After finishing the reach effect, the variable display of the decorative pattern is finished.

In addition, in the normal reach performance in the normal reach variation pattern or super reach variation pattern (super reach α, β, γ), the performance control CPU 120 determines the possibility (expected) that the variable display result will be a jackpot as a performance different from the variable display performance. It is possible to execute a preview performance A or a preview performance B that foretells the event (degree). Further, in the normal reach performance in the super reach variation pattern, it is possible to execute a development performance A that notifies the player that the normal reach performance will develop into a weak super reach performance (content that is advantageous to the player).

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 controls a development performance B that notifies that a weak super reach performance in the super reach variation pattern (super reach α, β, γ) will develop into a strong super reach performance (content that is advantageous to the player). It is possible to execute a development-suggesting performance that suggests the possibility that It is possible to execute development effect B that notifies the user of the content).

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a determined performance that notifies that the variable display result will be a jackpot or a miss in a strong super reach performance in a super reach variation pattern (super reach β, γ). .

In this way, in the variation pattern where the normal reach is off, the normal reach effect will not develop into a weak super reach effect and result in a jackpot or miss, and in the super reach variation pattern (super reach α, β, γ), the weak super reach effect will occur in the normal reach effect. In the super reach variation pattern (super reach β, γ), a weak super reach performance develops into a strong super reach performance.

In other words, super reach α is a weak super reach with higher expectations than normal reach, and super reach β and γ are strong super reaches with higher expectations than weak super reach (jackpot expectation; normal reach < super reach). α<super reach β<super reach γ).

In addition, for normal reach and super reach α, β, and γ, different types of normal reach effects and super reach effects may be executed, or super reach effects of common or at least partially similar types may be executed. It may be executed. Further, the types of super reach are not limited to the above three types, and may be one or two types, or four or more types.

In the characteristic part 241SG, in the above-mentioned preview performance A, preview performance B, development performance A, B, development suggestion performance, and final performance, the mounted movable body 32, which is a structure, may be moved, and the first pseudo movable body display described later. It is possible to move and display the second pseudo movable body display. Therefore, before explaining the specific contents of each effect, the mounted movable body 32, the first pseudo movable body display, and the second pseudo movable body display will be explained.

(Flow of development of pachinko machines)
First, in order to understand how the pachinko gaming machine 1 was equipped with the above-mentioned mounted movable body 32, first pseudo movable body display, second pseudo movable body display, etc., we will discuss the development of the pachinko gaming machine 1. An outline of the flow will be explained based on FIG. 14-12. FIG. 14-12 is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of the development flow of a pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in Figure 14-12, when the development of a given pachinko machine (for example, pachinko machine 1) begins, we first clarify what we want to convey to the game parlor and the players, and what we want them to feel. A proposal is created based on the specifications (step 241SGS001). Specifically, consideration will be given to the game content, highlights, specs, game flow, presentation structure such as reach, board structure, movable objects (structures), etc. for the relevant machine.

Next, based on the proposal, prototypes (primary prototypes, design mocks) of the board (gaming board), videos and materials that can be visualized with variable displays, spec confirmation tables, etc. are created (step 241SGS002). At the stage of creating this prototype, for example, it was planned to mount multiple movable bodies, but there were reasons why it was not possible to mount multiple movable bodies (for example, lack of space such as interference with other movable bodies, cost, etc.) Problems such as durability may occur.

Next, images such as variable display and effects are created (step 241SGS003). Here, regarding the production video, based on the design and motion of the movable body that could not be mounted due to a problem in step 241SGS002, a pseudo movable body display video that imitates the movable body that could not be mounted is created. . Furthermore, since the movement display using the pseudo-movable object display has a lower impact than when moving a movable object that is not mounted, for example, the reaction display operation when the moving object is displayed and stopped, or the speed of the movement display is lower. It is often displayed in a deformed manner (exaggerated or highlighted).

Then, create a prototype (secondary prototype) of the board (gaming board) that includes images of variable displays and effects, and check the variable displays, core effects, movement of movable objects, etc. (step 241SGS004), If there is no problem, molds and the like for the board (game board) are created (step 241SGS005).

In this way, by installing multiple movable bodies that can provide players with an impactful performance, it is possible to further enhance the performance effect and diversify the performance, but due to the various problems mentioned above, it is not possible to actually It is often difficult to install multiple devices. Therefore, based on the design and operation of the movable body that could not be mounted, a moving display of a pseudo movable body display that imitates the movable body that could not be mounted is increasingly used.

In the following, the pachinko game machine 1 as the feature part 241SG was planned to be equipped with a plurality of movable bodies at the development stage, but due to the various problems mentioned above, one movable body ( For example, it has been decided to mount the movable body 32), and the other movable bodies (for example, the first movable body M100 and the second movable body M200) have not been determined to be mounted, so they are not mounted. In place of the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200, a first pseudo movable body display imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100 and a movement display imitating the second non-mounted movable body M200 are used. A description will be given assuming that the moving display of the second pseudo movable body display is adopted.

In the above, the pseudo movable body display was adopted as a substitute for the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200, which were ultimately not mounted, but the present invention applies to this. Although it is possible to mount a movable body, there are cases where a pseudo movable body display is intentionally used in order to diversify the presentation. It is also possible to use a pseudo movable body display that imitates a movable body that is not scheduled to be installed at the development stage (for example, a virtual movable body, a movable body that is installed or scheduled to be installed in another model, etc.).

(Mounted movable body 32)
The mounting movable body 32 will be explained below based on FIGS. 14-13. In FIGS. 14-13, (A) is a diagram showing a movement mode of the movable mounting body, and (B) is a diagram illustrating a situation in which the movable mounting body is lifted.

As shown in FIG. 14-13(A), the mounted movable body 32 is formed into a substantially trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front, and is composed of a production section 32A and a mechanism section 32B, each having a decoration etc. on the front surface. By supporting the left and right sides of the mechanism section 32B extending in the left and right sides, respectively, by the drive mechanisms 201L and 201R arranged on the left and right sides of the image display device 5, the upper origin position (FIG. 14-13 (A) ) and a production position below the origin position (the position indicated by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 14-13(A)). Note that the mechanism section 32B is a transmission member that transmits the power of the drive mechanisms 201L and 201R to the performance section 32A.

The drive mechanisms 201L, 201R include mounted movable body motors 202L, 202R, drive gears 203L, 203R fixed to the drive shafts of the mounted movable body motors 202L, 202R, and driven gears 204L, 204R that mesh with the drive gears 203L, 203R. , rotation shafts 205L, 205R that face in the vertical direction and have driven gears 204L, 204R fixed to their lower ends, movable bodies 206L, 206R inserted into the rotation shafts 205L, 205R, and mounted movable body 32 are held at the origin position. It mainly includes mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R that can be mounted, and a mounted movable body LED 208 (see FIG. 14-2) that is built in the production section 32A and can emit a light emitting part 208A consisting of the letter "X".

In the mounted movable body 32, the left and right ends (guided parts) of the mechanism section 32B are inserted (guided) into the rotation shafts 205L, 205R so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and are locked by the mounted movable body solenoids 207L, 207R. This allows it to be held at the origin position. When the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R are turned on and released from the locked state while being held at the home position, the mounted movable body 32 is dropped by its own weight from the home position, and the left and right ends of the mechanism section 32B are comes into contact with the movable bodies 206L, 206R and is restricted from moving downward, thereby stopping at the presentation position.

Further, a spiral groove 205A is formed on the outer periphery of the rotating shafts 205L, 205R, while a locking portion (not shown) that can be locked in the groove 205A is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the movable bodies 206L, 206R. Since the rotary shafts 205L and 205R are formed and rotation around the rotary shafts 205L and 205R is restricted, it is possible to move vertically by rotating the rotary shafts 205L and 205R in forward and reverse directions using the mounted movable body motors 202L and 202R. It is said that Therefore, the mounted movable body 32 can fall from the origin position to the production position by its own weight, and after falling, the mounted movable body motors 202L and 202R rotate the rotating shaft 205L as shown in FIG. , 205R to raise the movable bodies 206L and 206R, they rise from the production position to the origin position, and are held at the origin position by the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R.

(First pseudo movable display and first non-mounted movable object)
Next, the first pseudo movable display and the first non-mounted movable body will be explained based on FIGS. 14-14. In FIGS. 14-14, (A) is a diagram showing a movement display mode of the first pseudo movable object display, and (B) is a diagram showing a movement mode of the first non-mounted movable body.

The first pseudo movable object display Z100 shown in FIG. 14-14(A) was planned to be installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIG. 14-14(B), but due to various circumstances, it was not installed. The image is said to be a model of the first non-mounted movable body M100.

The first non-mounted movable body M100, which is not mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, is composed of a production section M100A and a mechanism section M100B, which are formed into a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front and decorated with decorations etc. The left side of the mechanism section M100B extending leftward is supported by the drive mechanism M101 disposed on the left side of the image display device 5, so that the upper first origin position (2 in FIG. 14-14(B)) It is possible to move in the vertical direction between the origin position (indicated by a dotted chain line) and a first presentation position (indicated by a solid line in FIG. 14-14(B)) below the first origin position.

The drive mechanism M101 includes a movable motor M102, a drive gear M103 fixed to a drive shaft of the movable motor M102, a driven gear M104 that meshes with the drive gear M103, and a driven gear M104 fixed to a lower end thereof and facing in the vertical direction. A rotation axis M105, a movable body solenoid M107 capable of holding the first non-mounted movable body M100 at the first origin position, a movable body M106 inserted into the rotation axis M105, and built in the production part M100A, when viewed from the front. It mainly includes a circular light emitting portion M108A and a non-mounted movable body LED (not shown) capable of emitting light.

In addition, the effect part M100A has a striped decoration on the front side and has four effect movable parts M110A to M110D arranged around the light emitting part M108A, and the effect movable parts M110A to M110D are arranged in the first part adjacent to each other. It is possible to change between a presentation state (the state shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 14-14(B)) and a second presentation state in which the presentation movable parts M110A to M110D are radially separated from the light emitting part M108A.

The first non-mounted movable body M100 is configured such that the left end part (guided part) of the mechanism part M100B is inserted (guided) into the rotation shaft M105 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and is locked by the movable body solenoid M107. 1 It is held at the origin position. When the movable body solenoid M107 is turned on and released from the locked state while being held at the first origin position, the first non-mounted movable body M100 is dropped by its own weight from the first origin position, and the mechanism part M100B The left and right end portions of the movable body M106 come into contact with the movable body M106, and downward movement is restricted, so that the movable body M106 is stopped at the first performance position.

Further, a spiral groove M105A is formed on the outer periphery of the rotation shaft M105, while a locking portion (not shown) capable of locking in the groove M105A is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the movable body M106, and Since the rotation around the rotation axis M105 is restricted, the rotation axis M105 can be moved in the vertical direction by rotating the rotation axis M105 in forward and reverse directions using the movable body motor M102. Therefore, the first non-mounted movable body M100 can fall from the first origin position to the first performance position by its own weight, and after falling, the movable body motor M102 rotates the rotation axis M105 to move the movable body M106. By raising it, it rises from the first performance position to the first specific origin position, and is held at the first origin position by the movable body solenoid M107.

As shown in FIG. 14-14(A), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is an image imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100, and includes a production display section Z100A corresponding to the production section M100A, and a mechanism section. It has a mechanism display section Z100B corresponding to M100B and a light emitting display section Z108A corresponding to light emitting section M108A. The display can be moved in the vertical direction between the first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and the first effect display position corresponding to the first effect position (see FIG. 14-16(B)). ), the display can be moved in the vertical direction between a first initial display position corresponding to a position different from the first origin position and a first effect display position corresponding to a position different from the first effect position (Fig. 14-17(A)). Furthermore, the production section M100A has production movable display parts Z110A to Z110D corresponding to the production movable parts M110A to M110D, and a first production display state corresponding to the first production state and a second production display state corresponding to the second production state. It is possible to change the performance display state.

(Second pseudo movable display and second non-mounted movable object)
Next, the second pseudo movable display and the second non-mounted movable body will be explained based on FIGS. 14-15. In FIGS. 14-15, (A) is a diagram showing a movement display mode of the second pseudo movable body display, and (B) is a diagram showing a movement mode of the second non-mounted movable body.

The second pseudo movable object display Z200 shown in FIG. 14-15(A) was planned to be installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, as shown in FIGS. 14-15(B) and (C), but due to various circumstances, it was not installed. The image is said to be a model of the second non-mounted movable body M200 that has been mounted.

Regarding the second non-mountable movable body M200, at the beginning of development there were two mounting plans with different operating modes (for example, mounting plan 1 shown in Figure 14-15 (B) and mounting plan 1 shown in Figure 14-15 (C)). Mounting plan 2) was devised, but due to development reasons, the second non-mountable movable object itself could not be mounted, so as the second pseudo movable object display Z200, a movement corresponding to mounting plan 1 explained below was used. display and a moving display corresponding to installation plan 2 can be executed.

As shown in FIGS. 14-15 (B) and (C), the second non-mounted movable body M200 that is not mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a production part M200A that is circular in shape when viewed from the front and decorated on the front surface. The lower end of the mechanism part M100B is supported by the first drive mechanism M201A disposed on the lower side of the image display device 5 (Installation plan 1: B)), and a second presentation device (installation plan 2: see FIG. 14-15(C)) supported by a second drive mechanism M201B in which the upper end of the mechanism part M100B is disposed above the image display device 5. are incorporated into each of the.

As shown in FIG. 14-15(B), the first drive mechanism M201A includes a movable body motor (not shown) provided on the back side of the base member M202, and a rotating body rotated by the movable body motor (not shown). M203, and a guide rail M204 that guides the production section M200A in a vertically movable manner. The mechanism part M200B has one end supported so as to be rotatable about a rotation axis pointing in the front-rear direction with respect to the base member M202, and a connecting shaft M205 protruding from the peripheral edge of the front surface of the rotary body M203 that slides. A long hole M206 is formed into which it can be inserted.

Therefore, the second non-mounted movable body M200 driven by the first drive mechanism M201A rotates the rotating body M203 by the movable body motor (not shown) and rotates the mechanism part M200B around the rotation axis. The first specific origin position below (the origin position indicated by the two-dot chain line in Fig. 14-15 (B)) and the first specific production position above the first specific origin position (indicated by the solid line in Fig. 14-15 (B)) It is possible to move vertically between the two positions.

In addition, the production section M200A includes a rotating section M207 that is circular in front view, and a plurality of (for example, 5) light emitting sections M208A to M208E provided on the rotating section M207 with non-mounted movable LEDs (not shown) that can emit light. , the non-mounted movable LED (not shown) lights up while the rotating part M207 rotates, and the light emitting parts M208A to M208E can emit light in multiple colors (for example, 7 colors). There is.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-15(C), the second drive mechanism M201B includes a movable body motor M212, a drive gear M213 fixed to the drive shaft of the movable body motor M212, and a driven gear that meshes with the drive gear M213. M214, and a rotation shaft M215 that faces in the left-right direction and has a driven gear M214 fixed to the left end thereof. Further, a spiral groove M215A is formed on the outer periphery of the rotation shaft M215, and a mechanism section M200B extending upward from the production section M200A has a locking mechanism on the inner circumferential surface that can be locked in the groove M215A. (not shown), and rotation about the rotation axis M215 is regulated.

Therefore, the second non-mounted movable body M200 driven by the second drive mechanism M201B moves the second specific origin position on the left side (Fig. 14-15 (C ), the second specific production position on the right side (the position indicated by the solid line in FIG. 14-15(C)) is movable in the left-right direction, and the second specific origin It is possible to stop at a second intermediate performance position between the position and the second specific performance position.

As shown in FIG. 14-15(A), the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is an image imitating the second non-mounted movable body M200, and includes a production display section Z200A corresponding to the production section M200A, and a mechanism section. It has a mechanism display section Z200B corresponding to M200B, a rotating display section Z207 corresponding to rotating section M207, and light emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E corresponding to light emitting sections M208A to M208E.

In addition, at the beginning of development, it was planned to install a full-color LED as a non-mounted movable object LED (not shown), but due to cost reasons, it may be necessary to install a single-color LED, but the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 By doing so, the light emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E can be displayed in a plurality of colors (for example, seven colors) without considering cost.

The display is movable in the vertical direction between the first specific initial display position corresponding to the first specific origin position and the first specific effect display position corresponding to the first specific effect position (Fig. 14-16 (C)), the display can be moved in the left-right direction between a second specific initial display position corresponding to the second specific origin position and a second specific effect display position corresponding to the second specific effect position (see FIG. (See 14-17(B)).

Next, the movement mode of the mounted movable body 32 and the movement display mode of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 will be described based on FIGS. 14-16 and 14-17. 14-16, (A) shows the movable range of the non-mounted movable body, (B) shows the movable display area of the first pseudo movable body display, and (C) shows the movable display area of the second pseudo movable body display. It is a diagram. FIGS. 14-17 are diagrams in which (A) shows a specific movement display area of the first pseudo-movable object display, and (B) shows a specific movement display area of the second pseudo-movable object display.

As shown in FIG. 14-16(A), the mounted movable body 32 has an origin position where the lower part of the presentation part 32A overlaps the upper part of the display area of the image display apparatus 5, and an abbreviation of the display area of the image display apparatus 5. It is possible to move vertically between a production position where the production section 32A and the mechanism section 32B overlap in the center, and the moving distance from the origin position to the production position is L1.

As shown in FIG. 14-16(B), the first pseudo movable object display Z100 has a first initial display position where the lower part of the effect display section Z100A is displayed at the upper position of the display area of the image display device 5; The first initial display is movable in the vertical direction between a first effect display position where the effect display part Z100A and the mechanism display part Z100B are displayed at a position approximately below the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and a first initial display. The moving display distance from the position to the first effect display position is L2.

As shown in FIG. 14-17(A), the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 has a first specific initial display position where the upper part of the effect display part Z100A is displayed at the lower position of the display area of the image display device 5. , a first specific effect display position where the effect display part Z100A and the mechanism display part Z100B are displayed at a position substantially above the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the first specific effect display position can be moved in the vertical direction. The specific movement display distance from the specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position is set to L2A.

In this way, the first pseudo movable body display Z100, like the first non-mounted movable body M100, has a first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and a first effect display position corresponding to the first effect position. Not only can the movable range between them be moved up and down, but also specific movement is possible between a second initial display position that does not correspond to the first origin position and a second effect display position that does not correspond to the first effect position. The range can be displayed by moving up and down.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-16(C), the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial stage in which the lower part of the effect display section Z200A is displayed at the upper position of the display area of the image display device 5. The display is movable in the vertical direction between the display position and a first specific effect display position where the effect display part Z200A and the mechanism display part Z200B are displayed at approximately the center position of the display area of the image display device 5, The moving display distance from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position is set to L3.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-17(B), the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is a second specific display in which the right part of the effect display part Z200A is displayed at the left position of the display area of the image display device 5. The display can be moved in the left-right direction between the initial display position and a second specific effect display position where the effect display part Z200A and the mechanism display part Z200B are displayed at approximately the center position of the display area of the image display device 5. , the moving display distance from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position is L3A.

In this way, the second pseudo movable body display Z200, like the second non-mounted movable body M200, displays the first specific initial display position corresponding to the first specific origin position and the first specific performance corresponding to the first specific performance position. Not only can the movable range between the display position and the display position be moved in the vertical direction, but also a second specific initial display position that does not correspond to the first specific origin position and a second specific effect display that does not correspond to the first specific effect position It is possible to move and display a specific movable range between the positions in the left and right directions.

Further, the movement display distance L2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is longer than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32, and the movement display distance L3 of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is longer than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32. (L2>L1>L3). Further, the movement display distance L2A of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is longer than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32, and the movement display distance L3A of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32. and movement display distance L2A (L3A>L2A>L1).

In this way, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo movable object display Z200 can move and display a movement display distance (L2, L2A, L3A) that is longer than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable object 32. Therefore, it is possible to realize a more impactful performance than the mounted movable body 32.

As shown in FIG. 14-16, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are composed of effect display parts Z100A, Z200A and mechanism display parts Z100B, Z200B. is extended to the edge of the display area of the image display device 5, so that the display is performed as if by the drive mechanism M101, first drive mechanism M201A, and second drive mechanism M201B arranged on the side of the image display device 5. Since the display sections Z100A and Z200A appear to be supported, it is possible to more realistically express a moving display.

In other words, a pseudo-movable object display (pseudo-movable object image) refers to a movable object as a structure that can be operated by a drive mechanism, such as a movable object mounted on the pachinko game machine 1, a movable object not mounted on the pachinko game machine 1, a virtual movable object, etc. This is a simulated display, and is different from an image that does not have a mechanism display section, such as the development notification image Z300 (see FIG. 14-25 (H)).

In addition, some display modes may be different from those of the modeled movable body, displays that cannot be realized with the modeled movable body (for example, deformed display, deformed display, etc.), or movement displays (for example, high-speed movement display, etc.) ) is possible as long as it is possible.

In addition, the pseudo-movable object display (pseudo-movable object image) may be an image or moving image created by a computer or the like, or may be an image or moving image of an actually created movable object as a structure. There may be. Furthermore, when these pseudo-movable object displays move, sound effects that are the same as or similar to the sound effects that are output when moving the movable object or the impact sounds that occur when the movable object stops are output, and the pseudo-movable object displays are displayed in a dramatic manner. When the position is reached, the vibration motor 61 vibrates the push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc., and the speakers 8L and 8R output deep bass to generate a pseudo shock, making it more realistic. It becomes possible to provide performances to players.

Next, details of various effects using the above-mentioned mounted movable body 32, first pseudo movable body display Z100, and second pseudo movable body display Z200 will be explained using FIG. 14-10. FIG. 14-10 is a diagram for explaining the content and structure of various effects in Super Reach.

(Preview performance A)
As shown in FIG. 14-10, the preview effect A is executable when the base state is low, and the first specific effect is executed after the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position. After being moved to the display position, the light emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E display light in a color corresponding to the determined performance pattern, thereby suggesting the possibility (expectation level) of a jackpot.

In addition, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that was moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position is erased after being moved and displayed from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position. (See Figures 14-25 (C) to (F)).

In detail, when pattern PYA-1 is determined in the preview performance A type determination process of step 241SGS278A, which will be described later, the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E are displayed in white, and when pattern PYA-2 is determined, the light emitting display parts are displayed in white. The display parts Z208A to Z208E are displayed in blue. When pattern PYA-3 is determined, the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E are displayed in green. When pattern PYA-4 is determined, the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E are displayed in green. Displayed in red. Therefore, the light emitting display color of the light emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E with the highest expectation of jackpot is red. Note that the emitted light color can be changed in various ways, and if a jackpot is confirmed, the emitted light may be made to emit gold or rainbow colors.

(Preview performance B)
Preview effect B is executable when in the high base state, and the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position or from the second initial display position to the second effect display position. The variable display result is a jackpot depending on whether the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position or the second specific effect display position. This suggests the possibility (expectation level) of

In addition, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the first effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the first effect display position to the first initial display position (Figure 14-34 (A) (See ~(C)). Furthermore, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the second effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second effect display position to the second initial display position (Figure 14-34 (D) (See ~(F)).

Further, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second intermediate effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second intermediate effect display position to the second specific initial display position (Figure 14-33 (See (A) to (C)). Further, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second specific effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second specific effect display position to the second specific initial display position (Figure 14-33 (See (D) to (F)).

More specifically, when pattern PYB-1 is determined in the preview performance B type determination process of step 241SGS278A, which will be described later, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moves from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position. is displayed, and when pattern PYB-2 is determined, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position, and when pattern PYB-3 is determined, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed. The first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and when pattern PYB-4 is determined, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the second initial display position to the second effect display position. The image is moved to the display position and displayed. Therefore, when the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is moved and displayed, and the moving display pattern with the highest jackpot expectation is the first This is a pattern in which the pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the second initial display position to the second effect display position.

In addition, it is better for the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to move and display from the first initial display position to the first effect display position or from the second initial display position to the second effect display position, and for the second pseudo movable body display Z200 to move from the second effect display position to the second effect display position. This is faster than moving and displaying from the specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position or the second specific effect display position.

(Development performance A)
In the development effect A, the development to a weak super reach is notified by the mounted movable body 32 moving (falling) from the origin position to the effect position (see FIG. 14-25 (H)). The mounted movable body 32, which has been moved from the origin position to the production position, rises from the production position to the origin position and returns after a predetermined time has elapsed.

In detail, if execution is determined in the development performance A type determination process of step 241SGS278B, which will be described later, the mounted movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the performance position at the performance start timing, and the development to weak super reach occurs. will be notified (see Figure 14-25 (H)). On the other hand, if non-execution is determined, the mounted movable body 32 does not fall from the origin position at the production start timing, and the development to weak super reach is notified by displaying the development notification image Z300 on the image display device 5. (See Figure 14-25 (G)). In other words, non-execution is determined in the development performance A type determination process, which means that a performance pattern is determined that notifies the development to weak super reach by displaying the development notification image Z300 without causing the mounted movable body 32 to fall. It is.

Incidentally, the development notification image Z300 is an image (display) imitating the mounted movable body 32, but like the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200, it is similar to the movable body. Unlike the pseudo movable object display that is displayed moving, it is an image (display) that only imitates the effect section 32A, and is displayed in a display mode different from the movement of the mounted movable object 32. For example, at the performance start timing, the display is displayed from the beginning at the performance display position corresponding to the performance position of the mounted movable body 32 without any moving display.

(Development suggestion performance)
The development suggestion performance can be executed before development performance B is executed, and the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position and then moved and displayed to the first specific performance display position. After that, based on the fact that the repeated tapping operation of the push button 31B by the player (operation in which the detection signal of the push sensor 35B is detected multiple times within a predetermined period) is detected during the valid operation period, the light is emitted. By changing the display parts Z208A to Z208E to the light emitting display color corresponding to the determined effect pattern, it is suggested that the display color of the character image Z310, which will be described later, may be executed, that is, the possibility that the advanced effect B will be executed.

In addition, in the feature section 241SG, an operation promotion image (for example, an image imitating the push button 31B) that promotes the repeated pressing operation of the push button 31B during the valid operation period in which the repeated pressing operation of the push button 31B in the development suggestion performance is valid. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the button LED 62 (see FIG. 14-2) built into the push button 31B is lit without displaying it on the image display device 5, the repeated pressing operation of the push button 31B is promoted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the image display device 5 may display an operation promotion display that promotes repeated pressing of the push button 31B during the valid operation period.

In addition, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position is such that the character image Z310 related to the model is in the first specific display area of the image display device 5. After being displayed so as to overlap (act) with the second pseudo movable object display Z200 in the area including the effect display position, it is erased without being moved and displayed from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position. (See Figures 14-26 (A) to (J) and Figure 14-27 (A)).

More specifically, when pattern PS-1 is determined in the development suggestion production type determination process of step 241SGS278B, which will be described later, the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E remain white even if the push button 31B is repeatedly pressed, and do not change. When pattern PS-2 is determined, the light-emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E change from white to blue in response to repeated presses of the push button 31B, and when pattern PS-3 is determined, the light-emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E changes in the order of white → blue → green according to the repeated pressing of the push button 31B, and when pattern PS-4 is determined, the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E change from white → blue → according to the repeated pressing of the push button 31B. Changes from green to red. Therefore, the final light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E with the highest degree of expectation for execution of the advanced effect B is red.

Note that the emitted light color and the change pattern of the emitted light color can be changed in various ways. For example, the emitted light color may change from white to red without changing to blue or green, or the emitted light display color may be set as a color other than white from the beginning. . In addition, the number of lights on the plurality of light emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E is increased in response to repeated presses of the push button 31B, so that the degree of expectation for the execution of the development effect B is higher when the number of lights on is larger than when the number of lights is small. It's okay. Furthermore, the degree of expectation may vary depending on the color of the emitted light and the number of emitted light.

In addition, in the feature section 241SG, if the repeated press operation of the push button 31B is not detected during the valid operation period, or if the amount of repeated press operation is small, even if any of patterns PS-2 to PS-4 is determined, the exemplifies a mode in which the luminescent display color does not change according to each pattern PS-2 to PS-4, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the continuous press operation of the push button 31B is not detected during the valid operation period. Alternatively, even if the amount of repeated tapping operations is small, the light emitting display color may be changed to correspond to the determined patterns PS-2 to PS-4 at the timing when the valid operation period ends.

Furthermore, the character image Z310 displayed after the valid operation period ends is a character image Z310 of a color corresponding to the light emitting display color of the light emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E when the valid operation period ends. There is.

Note that character images Z310 of different types may be displayed depending on the luminescent display colors of the luminescent display sections Z208A to Z208E when the valid operation period ends. Furthermore, even if the light emitting display colors of the light emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E do not change even though one of the patterns PS-2 to PS-4 is determined as described above, the determined pattern PS-2 to PS-4 The character image Z310 may be displayed in a color corresponding to the color (different color from the light emitting display color of the light emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E). Further, the light emitting display color of the light emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E may be changed to the same color as the character image Z310 at the timing when the character image Z310 is displayed.

(Development performance B)
The developed effect B is that the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 moves from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, thereby developing into a strong super reach effect and executing the decisive effect (game (Contents that are advantageous to the person) are notified (see Figure 14-27 (D)). In addition, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the first specific effect display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position (Figure 14-27 ( (See D) to (F)).

In addition, when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is erased without moving and displaying from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position, a reach title is displayed in the display area including the first specific effect display position. By displaying the image Z51 so as to overlap the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in a manner that indicates that it is the time to start displaying the image, the variable display result becomes a jackpot (it is controlled to a jackpot gaming state). ) is suggested.

In detail, if execution is determined in the advanced performance B type determination process of step 241SGS280, which will be described later, the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position at the performance start timing. By moving and displaying, the development to a strong super reach is announced (see Figure 14-27 (D)). On the other hand, if non-execution is determined, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is not moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position at the effect start timing, and the reach title image Z51 is displayed on the image display device 5. The development to a strong super reach is notified by displaying it in a ready state (see FIG. 14-27(C)). In other words, when non-execution is determined in the development effect B type determination process, the reach title image Z51 is displayed in a prepared state without moving and displaying the second pseudo movable object display Z200, thereby leading to a strong super reach. The effect is to determine a performance pattern that informs the development of.

(Decision performance)
The deciding performance is a performance that concludes the battle between the friendly character and the enemy character that was being executed in the super reach performance, and notifies whether or not the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. Specifically, for example, after a display is performed in which the friendly character deals the final blow to the enemy character, a display is performed to encourage the player to operate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, and the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is The enemy character is moved by moving the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the production position at the timing when the operation of the push button 31B or stick controller 31A is detected, or when the operation validity period ends without detecting the operation of the push button 31B or stick controller 31A. Either a confirmed jackpot notification in which the character is defeated and wins the battle, or a confirmed loss notification in which the mounted movable body 32 is not moved from the origin position to the performance position and is defeated by the enemy character and loses the battle is performed.

Patterns KB-1 and KV-1 are selected when the variable display result is a failure, and are patterns in which an ally character is defeated by an enemy character and loses the battle, and a failure confirmation notification is performed.Patterns KB-2 and KV-2 is a pattern that is selected when the variable display result is a jackpot, and a jackpot confirmed notification is performed in which the ally character defeats the enemy character and wins the battle.

In addition, in patterns KB-2 and KV-2, the timing when the operation of the push button 31B or stick controller 31A is detected, or the timing when the operation valid period ends without detecting the operation of the push button 31B or stick controller 31A. Then, a vibration effect is performed in which the vibration motor 61 is driven for a predetermined period (for example, about 10 seconds) to vibrate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A.

In addition, if execution of pattern KB-2 or KV-2 is determined in the decision performance type determination process of step 241SGS282, which will be described later, the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position at the falling timing of the mounted movable body 32. After moving to , a jackpot confirmed notification is performed, and after returning from the production position to the origin position, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first production display position and displays the variable decorative pattern. The display will resume. Then, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first effect display position to the first initial display position, and the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, so that the variable display result becomes a jackpot (Fig. 14 -29 (E) to (G), see Figures 14-30 (A) to (F)).

On the other hand, when it is decided to execute pattern KB-1 or KV-1, the movable mounted body 32 does not move from the origin position at the timing of the fall of the movable mounted body 32, and the effect image Z57 in which the glass is cracked is displayed. A failure confirmation notification is performed, and the variable display result becomes a failure (see FIGS. 14-29 (H) to (J)).

Next, regarding the jackpot expectation level according to the execution status of the advanced performance A using the mounted movable body 32 and the advanced performance B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 in super reach β and γ (strong super reach) , will be explained based on FIG. 14-11. FIG. 14-11 is a diagram showing the jackpot expectation level according to the execution status of the advanced performance A and the advanced performance B.

As shown in Figure 14-11, pattern A is a pattern in which both development effect A and development effect B are not executed during the variable display period of the symbol based on the variation pattern of super reach β and γ (strong super reach). Yes, pattern B is a pattern in which the development effect A is not executed and the development effect B is executed, pattern C is a pattern in which the development effect A is executed and the development effect B is not executed, and pattern D is a pattern in which the development effect A is executed and the development effect B is not executed. This is a pattern in which both the development effect A and the development effect B are executed.

In the above, the jackpot expectation is set to increase in the order of pattern A<pattern B<pattern C<pattern D. That is, in the variable display period of the symbol based on the variation pattern of super reach β or super reach γ, development effect A using the mounted movable body 32 and development effect B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are executed. In this case, the ratio of being controlled to a jackpot game state (jackpot expectation level) is higher than when the development performance B is executed without the development performance A being executed. Also, the ratio of control to a jackpot game state when development performance A and development performance B are executed is higher than when development performance A is executed without execution of development performance B (jackpot expectation level) is high. Furthermore, when the advanced performance A and the advanced performance B are executed, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state (the jackpot expectation degree) is higher than when the advanced performance A and the developed performance B are not executed.

FIG. 14-18 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is in the ON state (step 241SGS271; Y), the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure pending memory in the reception command buffer at the time of start winning are set. Various command data and various flags stored in correspondence are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 241SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-1" in the first special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in correspondence with buffer number "1-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the first special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" of the 1st special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the 1st special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer numbers "1-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with buffer numbers "1-3".

If the first variable display start command reception flag is off in step 241SGS271 (step 241SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 241SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS273; Y ), the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure pending memory in the start winning reception command buffer 109SG194A are stored in one buffer number. It is shifted upward by minutes (step 241SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, various command data and various flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0". Then, the various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1", and the The various command data and various flags stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-3" of the 2nd special figure pending memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2", and the 2nd special figure Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number "2-4" in the pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 241SGS272 or step 241SGS274, the production control CPU 120 reads the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (step 241SGS275).

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 241SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stop symbols of the decorative symbols according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbols of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do.

In addition, in this characteristic part 241SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120, for example, displays 3 symbols as "7" as the stop symbols. ” to determine the combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to probability variable jackpot B, multiple combinations of odd symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", Decorative pattern combinations such as "333", "555", "999", etc.) are selected. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the 4th variable display result designation command that corresponds to probability variable jackpot C, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the small hit. Decide from among them. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probable variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120, for example, selects a decorative pattern in which three symbols are arranged in an even number as a stop symbol. Determine the combination (jackpot symbol). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the 6th variable display result designation command that corresponds to a small hit, the stop symbols are "334" and "778", which are the same chances as the probability variable jackpot C. Decide from among them. In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command that corresponds to a loss, a decorative pattern in which three symbols are irregular as a stop symbol, and a combination other than the above-mentioned chance. (missing pattern) is determined.

In determining these stop symbols, the production control CPU 120 extracts random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which numerical values are associated with data indicating combinations of decorative symbols. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be determined. That is, the stop symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Next, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the variation pattern in the variable display is a normal reach variation pattern or a super reach variation pattern (step 241SGS277), and if it is a normal reach variation pattern or a super reach variation pattern (step 241SGS277). ;Y), executes the preview effect type determination process shown in FIG. 21(A) is executed to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the advanced performance A in the variable display (step 241SGS278B). When the pattern is not a normal reach variation pattern or a super reach variation pattern (step 241SGS277; N), the process proceeds to step 241SGS283.

As shown in FIG. 14-19, in the preview performance type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS301). The variable display result is a variable display for specifying the variable display result (loss, probability variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, probability variable jackpot C, non-probable variable jackpot, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. It can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the result designation command. Furthermore, as described above, the variation pattern can be specified using the variation pattern specification command stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, the targets of the preview performance are normal reach and super reach, so specifically, the variable display results are jackpot (probable variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, probability variable jackpot C, non-probable variable jackpot) or miss. The variable display result designation command may be used to specify whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, and the variation pattern specification command may be used to specify whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Incidentally, the case of probability variable jackpot C may be excluded from the preview performance.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the gaming state is a low base state (time saving state) (step 241SGS302), and if it is a low base state (step 241SGS302; Y), the random number for determining the preview performance is determined. At the same time, the performance pattern of the preview performance A is determined using the preview performance type determination table A shown in FIG. 14-20(A) (step 241SGS303). On the other hand, if it is not in the low base state, that is, if it is in the high base state (step 241SGS302; N), a random number for determining the preview performance is extracted, and a table B for determining the preview performance type shown in FIG. 14-20 (B) is extracted. The performance pattern of preview performance B is determined using (step 241SGS304).

As shown in Figure 14-20(A), in the table for determining the type of preview effect A, "Pattern PYA-1", "Pattern PYA-2", "Pattern PYA-3", and "Pattern PYA-4" are selected. For each, if the variable display result is a variable probability jackpot (any of variable probability jackpot A, variable probability jackpot B, variable probability jackpot C), if it is a non-probable variable jackpot, if the super reach is off, if the normal reach is off. A different determination value is assigned to each of them so that the number of determination values shown in FIG. 14-20(A) is obtained.

Specifically, in the case where the variable display result is a variable jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1" and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2". 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-3" and 50 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-4". In addition, in the case where the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1" and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2". , 50 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-3", and 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-4". In addition, when the variable display result is out of super reach, 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2". , 15 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-3", and 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-4". In addition, in the case where the variable display result is out of the normal reach, 80 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1", 10 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2", Eight determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-3" and two determination values are assigned to "pattern PYA-4."

By assigning judgment values in this way, if a variable display results in a variable jackpot, "Pattern PYA-4" will be determined at the highest rate, and in the case of a non-probable variable jackpot, "Pattern PYA-4" PYA-3" is determined at the highest rate, and when the super reach is off or the normal reach is off, the pattern PYA-1 is determined at the highest rate. In other words, "Pattern PYA-4" has the highest jackpot expectation, and "Pattern PYA-4" > "Pattern PYA-3" > "Pattern PYA-2" > "Pattern PYA-1" has the lowest jackpot expectation. Become. Note that the above determined ratio can be changed in various ways.

As shown in Figure 14-20(B), in the table for determining the type of preview effect B, "Pattern PYB-1", "Pattern PYB-2", "Pattern PYB-3", and "Pattern PYB-4" are selected. For each, if the variable display result is a variable probability jackpot (any of variable probability jackpot A, variable probability jackpot B, variable probability jackpot C), if it is a non-probable variable jackpot, if the super reach is off, if the normal reach is off. A different judgment value is assigned to each of them so that the number of judgment values shown in FIG. 14-20(B) is obtained.

Specifically, in the case where the variable display result is a variable jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1" and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2". 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-3" and 50 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-4". In addition, in the case where the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1" and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2". , 50 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-3", and 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-4". In addition, when the variable display result is out of super reach, 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2". , 15 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-3", and 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-4". In addition, in the case where the variable display result is out of the normal reach, 80 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PYB-1", 10 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PYB-2", Eight determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-3" and two determination values are assigned to "pattern PYB-4."

By assigning judgment values in this way, in the case of a probability variable jackpot in the variable display, "Pattern PYB-4" is determined at the highest rate, and in the case of a non-probability variable jackpot, "Pattern PYB-4" is determined at the highest rate. PYB-3'' is determined at the highest rate, and when the super reach is off or the normal reach is off, the pattern PYB-1 is determined at the highest rate. In other words, "Pattern PYB-4" has the highest jackpot expectation, and "Pattern PYB-3" > "Pattern PYB-3" > "Pattern PYB-2" > "Pattern PYB-1" has the lowest jackpot expectation. Become. Note that the above determined ratio can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the feature section 241SG, an example is given in which the determination ratio of each pattern is the same in the table for determining the type of preview performance A for the low base state and the table for determining the type of preview performance B for the high base state, The present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of each pattern may be made different between the table for determining the type of preview performance A and the table for determining the type of preview performance B.

Returning to FIG. 14-19, in step 241SGS305, the preview performance type determined in step 241SGS303 or step 241SGS304 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS305). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS306, and a period until the start of the performance is set in the preview performance start wait timer (step 241SGS306), and the process is ended.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-21, in the advanced performance A type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS311). The variable display result is a variable display for specifying the variable display result (loss, probability variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, probability variable jackpot C, non-probable variable jackpot, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. It can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the result designation command. Furthermore, as described above, the variation pattern can be specified using the variation pattern specification command stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, since the target of development effect A is normal reach and super reach, specifically, the variable display result is a jackpot (probable variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, probability variable jackpot C, non-probable variable jackpot) or It is sufficient to specify whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach using the variable display result specification command, and to specify whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach using the variation pattern specification command. Incidentally, the case of probability variable jackpot C may be excluded as a target of development performance A.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining the type of advanced performance, and determines the performance pattern of the advanced performance A using the table for determining the type of advanced performance A shown in FIG. 14-21(B) (step 241SGS312 ).

As shown in Figure 14-21 (B), in the table for determining the type of advanced performance A, the variable display results are variable display results for each pattern of "non-execution" and "execution". B, Probable Variable Jackpot C), Non-probable Variable Jackpot, Super Reach Miss, and Normal Reach Miss, the judgment values are shown in Figure 14-21 (B). It is assigned as a value number.

Specifically, in the case where the variable display result is a variable jackpot, 10 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 90 determination values are assigned to "execution". Furthermore, in the case where the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, 20 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 80 determination values are assigned to "execution". Furthermore, in the case where the variable display result is outside the super reach, 80 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 20 determination values are assigned to "execution". Furthermore, in the case where the variable display result is outside the normal reach, 100 determination values are assigned to "non-execution". In other words, when the normal reach is off, the development effect A is not executed because it does not develop into a weak super reach effect.

By assigning judgment values in this way, in the case of a definite variable jackpot or non-probable variable jackpot in the variable display, "Execution" is determined at the highest rate, and if the super reach is off or the normal reach is off, “Not executed” is determined at the highest rate. In other words, when the development effect A is executed, the expectation level of a jackpot is higher than when it is not executed. Note that the above determined ratio can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 14-21(A), in step 241SGS313, the advanced effect A type determined in step 241SGS312 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS314, and a period until the start of the performance is set in the advanced performance A start wait timer (step 241SGS314), and the process is ended.

Returning to FIG. 14-18, after executing the process of step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the fluctuation pattern in the variable display is a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS279), and If it is a pattern (step 241SGS279; Y), execute the development suggestion performance type determination process shown in FIG. 14-22(A) to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the development suggestion performance in the variable display (step 241SGS280), executes the advanced effect B type determination process shown in FIG. The decision production B type determination process shown in A) is executed to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the decision production in the variable display (step 241SGS282). When it is not a super reach variation pattern, that is, when it is a normal reach variation pattern (step 241SGS279; N), the process advances to step 241SGS283.

As shown in FIG. 14-22(A), in the development suggestion performance type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS321). The variable display result is a variable display for specifying the variable display result (loss, probability variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, probability variable jackpot C, non-probable variable jackpot, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. It can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the result designation command. Furthermore, as described above, the variation pattern can be specified using the variation pattern specification command stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, the targets of the preview performance are normal reach and super reach, so specifically, the variable display results are jackpot (probable variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, probability variable jackpot C, non-probable variable jackpot) or miss. The variable display result designation command may be used to specify whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, and the variation pattern specification command may be used to specify whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Incidentally, the case of probability variable jackpot C may be excluded from the preview performance.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining a development suggestion performance, and determines a performance pattern for the development suggestion performance using the table for determining the type of development suggestion performance shown in FIG. 14-22(B) (step 241SGS322 ).

As shown in Figure 14-22 (B), in the table for determining the type of advanced suggestion effect, "Pattern PS-1", "Pattern PS-2", "Pattern PS-3", and "Pattern PS-4" are For each, if the variable display result is a variable probability jackpot (any of variable probability jackpot A, variable probability jackpot B, variable probability jackpot C), if it is a non-probable variable jackpot, if the super reach is off, if the normal reach is off. A different determination value is assigned to each of them so that the number of determination values shown in FIG. 14-20(A) is obtained.

Specifically, in the case where the variable display result is a variable jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PS-1" and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PS-2". 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PS-3" and 50 determination values are assigned to "pattern PS-4". In addition, in the case where the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PS-1" and 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PS-2". , 50 determination values are assigned to "pattern PS-3", and 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PS-4". In addition, when the variable display result is out of super reach, 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PS-1" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PS-2". , 15 determination values are assigned to "pattern PS-3", and 5 determination values are assigned to "pattern PS-4".

By assigning judgment values in this way, in the case of a probability variable jackpot in the variable display, "Pattern PS-4" is determined at the highest rate, and in the case of a non-probability variable jackpot, "Pattern PS-4" is determined at the highest rate. "PS-3" is determined at the highest rate, and if the super reach is off, "Pattern PS-1" is determined at the highest rate. In other words, "Pattern PS-4" has the highest jackpot expectation, and "Pattern PS-4" > "Pattern PS-3" > "Pattern PS-2" > "Pattern PS-1" has the lowest jackpot expectation. Become. Note that the above determined ratio can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 14-22(A), in step 241SGS323, the development suggestion production type determined in step 241SGS322 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS323). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS324, where a period until the start of the performance is set in the development suggestion performance start wait timer (step 241SGS324), and the process ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-23(A), in the advanced performance B type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first specifies the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS331). The variable display result is a variable display for specifying the variable display result (loss, probability variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, probability variable jackpot C, non-probable variable jackpot, small hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. It can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the result designation command. Furthermore, as described above, the variation pattern can be specified using the variation pattern specification command stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, the targets of the preview performance are normal reach and super reach, so specifically, the variable display results are jackpot (probable variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, probability variable jackpot C, non-probable variable jackpot) or miss. The variable display result designation command may be used to specify whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach, and the variation pattern specification command may be used to specify whether the variation pattern is normal reach or super reach. Incidentally, the case of probability variable jackpot C may be excluded from the preview performance.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 extracts the random number for determining the advanced performance, and determines the performance pattern of the advanced performance B using the advanced performance B type determination table shown in FIG. 14-23(B) (step 241SGS332). .

As shown in Figure 14-23 (B), in the table for determining the type of advanced performance B, the variable display results are variable display results for each of the "non-execution" and "execution" patterns (probable variable jackpot A, probability variable jackpot B, Probable Variable Jackpot C), non-probable variable jackpot, Super Reach is off, and Normal Reach is off, each with different judgment values as shown in Figure 14-23 (B). It is assigned as a value number.

Specifically, in the case where the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot, 20 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 80 determination values are assigned to "execution". Further, in the case where the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, 30 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 70 determination values are assigned to "execution". In addition, when the variable display result is out of super reach β/γ, 30 judgment values are assigned to “non-execution” and 70 judgment values are assigned to “execution”. . Furthermore, in the case where the variable display result is outside the super reach α, 100 determination values are assigned to “non-execution”. In other words, if the super reach α is off, the development effect B is not executed because it will not develop into a strong super reach effect.

By assigning judgment values in this way, in the case of a definite variable jackpot or non-probable variable jackpot in the variable display, "Execution" is determined at the highest rate, and if the super reach is off or the normal reach is off, “Not executed” is determined at the highest rate. In other words, the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the advanced performance B is executed than when it is not executed. Note that the above determined ratio can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 14-23(A), in step 241SGS333, the advanced effect B type determined in step 241SGS332 is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS333). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS334, and a period until the start of the performance is set in the development performance B start waiting timer (step 241SGS334), and the process is ended.

As shown in FIG. 14-24(A), in the final performance type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 determines the final performance type shown in FIG. 14-24(B) based on the variable display result specified in step 241SGS301. The performance pattern of the final performance is determined using the table for determining the performance (step 241SGS341). Next, the determined performance type is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS342), a period until the performance starts is set in the performance start wait timer (step 241SGS343), and the process is ended.

As shown in FIG. 14-24(B), in the table for determining the type of performance, there is a "pattern" that displays an operation promotion display that enables the operation of the push button 31B and encourages the player to perform a single press operation of the push button 31B. KB-1'', ``Pattern KB-2'', ``Pattern KV-1'', ``Pattern KV-'' which displays an operation promotion display that enables the operation of the stick controller 31A and encourages the player to pull the stick controller 31A. 2), if the variable display result is a guaranteed variable jackpot (any of variable variable jackpot A, variable variable jackpot B, variable variable jackpot C), if it is a non-probable variable jackpot, or if the super reach is off. Different determination values are assigned so that the number of determination values is shown in FIG. 14-24(B).

Specifically, in the case where the variable display result is a variable jackpot, 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern KB-2" and 70 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern KV-2". Assigned. In addition, in the case where the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, 70 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern KB-2" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern KV-2". ing. In addition, when the variable display result is out of super reach β/γ, 70 judgment values are assigned to “pattern KB-1” and 30 judgment values are assigned to “pattern KV-1”. is assigned.

By assigning judgment values in this way, in the case of a probability variable jackpot in the variable display, "pattern KV-1" in which the operation target is the stick controller 31A is determined at the highest rate, and a non-probability variable jackpot is determined. In this case, "Pattern KB-2" in which the operation target is the push button 31B is determined at the highest rate, and when the super reach is off, "Pattern KB-1" in which the operation target is the push button 31B is determined. ” is determined with the highest percentage. In other words, when the stick controller 31A is the operation target, the expectation of a variable jackpot is higher than when the push button 31B is the operation target. Note that the above determined ratio can be changed in various ways.

In this feature section 241SG, the random number for determining the preview performance, the random number for determining the development performance A, the random number for determining the development suggestion performance, the random number for determining the development performance B, and the random number for determining the final performance are each random numbers in the range of 1 to 100. Any value in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. In other words, the number of judgment values for these various production-determining random numbers is 100 in the range of 1 to 100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of these various production-determining random numbers can be changed as appropriate. All you have to do is decide. Further, a performance determining random number counter for generating these various performance determining random numbers is set in the RAM 122, and the performance determining random number counter is updated every timer interrupt by random number updating processing. Further, a common random number may be used as the random numbers for determining these various performances.

In addition, although this feature section 241SG has exemplified a form in which production patterns of various productions are determined in various production type determination processing, the present invention is not limited to this, and in addition to the above productions, for example, a character appears. It may also be possible to decide to execute a preview effect such as a character preview effect in which the preview image changes in stages, a step-up preview in which the preview image changes step by step, or a group preview in which a group of predetermined characters cross the display area. When determining, since the timing to start the preview performance differs depending on the format of the preview performance, different periods depending on the format of the preview performance may be set in the preview performance start wait timer, which will be described later.

Returning to FIG. 14-18, in step 241SGS283, the performance control CPU 120 selects the performance control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command. Then, the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 241SGS284).

The process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation part control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). There is.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 241SGS285). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this feature section 241SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative symbols are displayed variably according to the variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the production control CPU 120 The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 241SGS286). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 241SGS287). Note that the predetermined time is, for example, 33 ms, and each time the predetermined time elapses, the performance control CPU 120 writes image data that is being displayed in a variable manner, including image data that indicates the display state of the decorative symbol on the left center right, into the VRAM. The display control unit 123 outputs a signal according to the image data written in the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image according to the signal. As a result, variable display of decorative patterns and display of moving images of other effects are realized.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display performance process (step S172), and ends the variable display start setting process (step 241SGS288).

(Example of Super Reach β production operation)
Next, an example of the performance operation of super reach β will be explained based on FIGS. 14-25 to 14-31. FIGS. 14-25 (A) to (H) are diagrams showing examples of production operations mainly in normal reach of super reach β. In FIGS. 14-26, (A) to (J) are diagrams mainly showing examples of production operations in weak super reach. FIGS. 14-27 (A) to (F) are diagrams similarly showing examples of performance operations in weak super reach. FIGS. 14-28 (A) to (D) are diagrams mainly showing examples of production operations in strong super reach. In FIGS. 14-29, (E) to (J) are diagrams showing examples of performance operations of strong super reach performance. 14-30, (A) to (F) are diagrams showing examples of performance operations after notification of jackpot confirmation. 14-31, (A) to (D) are diagrams showing details of the movement display of the first pseudo movable object display. FIG. 14-32 is a diagram showing the relationship between the light emitting display section and the mounted movable body LED.

Below, examples of various performance operations in the variable display period based on the variation pattern of super reach β will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 14-25 (A), the production control CPU 120 variably displays decorative symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R based on the variation pattern of super reach β based on the occurrence of a starting prize. Start. In addition, in the upper left of the display area of the image display device 5, there are small numbers corresponding to the first pending memory number (for example, the number "2"), the second pending memory number (for example, the number "0"), and the decorative pattern. A display area 5SL for displaying symbols (for example, arrows "↓↓↓") is provided, and small symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of decorative symbols.

In addition, regarding the first suspended memory number, the second suspended memory number, small symbols, and an error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z100 Since it is displayed on the front side (upper layer) than the movable body display Z200, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 overlap, and the first pending memory number, second pending memory number, and small While the visibility of the symbols and error displays is prevented from decreasing, the decorative symbols are displayed further back (lower layer) than the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200. Therefore, the visibility of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is prevented from being reduced due to overlapping of decorative patterns.

After starting the variable display, as shown in FIG. 14-25(B), when the variable display mode is set to the normal reach display mode, the normal reach effect as the variable display effect of the decorative symbol is started.

As shown in FIG. 14-25(C), the performance control CPU 120 moves the second pseudo movable body display Z200 to the first specific initial display position at the start timing of the preview performance A when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode. After being displayed in the first specific effect display position (see FIG. 14-25 (D)), as shown in FIG. By displaying the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E in a display color corresponding to the pattern (any of PYA-1 to PYA-4), a notice effect A indicating that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state is executed. Further, an effect image Z60 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the first specific effect display position.

Note that the effect image Z60 is displayed in a manner corresponding to the luminescent display colors of the luminescent display sections Z208A to Z208E. For example, when the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E are displayed in white based on the pattern PYA-1, the effect image Z60 is white and the display size is small, and the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E are displayed in white based on the pattern PYA-4. When the light emitting display color of Z208E is red, it is preferable that the effect image Z60 is red and the display size becomes large according to the expectation level.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-25(F), the effect image Z60 is erased, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position, and then the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed. By erasing the pseudo movable body display Z200, the preview performance A is ended. Thereafter, the decorative pattern is reduced and displayed in a display area 5SR provided at the upper right of the display area of the image display device 5 in a manner that is slightly larger than the small pattern.

If non-execution of development performance A is determined in the development performance A type determination processing of step 241SGS278B, as shown in FIG. 14-25 (G), at the start timing of development performance A, the mounted movable body 32 is held at the origin position without falling, a development notification image Z300 is displayed, and an effect image Z61A is displayed around it, to notify that a weak super reach performance will develop. In addition, if it is decided to execute the development effect A, as shown in FIG. 14-25 (H), at the start timing of the development effect A, the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R are turned on and the mounted movable body 32 is dropped from the origin position to the performance position, and an effect image Z61B different from the effect image Z61A for emphasizing the mounted movable body 32 is displayed around it to notify that a weak super reach performance will develop.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, when the mounted movable body 32 is executed as the development effect A, the ratio of control to the jackpot game state is higher than when it is not executed. Even if it has been decided not to perform (the fall of the player), by displaying the development notification image Z300, it is possible to notify that the performance will develop into a weak super reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 14-26(A), after the execution period of the developed effect A ends, the effect control CPU 120 starts the weak super reach effect by displaying the character image Z310, and also starts the weak super reach effect by displaying the character image Z310. After displaying the movable body display Z200 at the first specific initial display position, it is moved and displayed at the first specific performance display position to start the development suggestion performance (see FIG. 14-26(B)). At this time, the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is displayed so as to partially overlap the character image Z310 on the near side.

Furthermore, when the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is moved and displayed to the first specific effect display position as a development suggestion effect, the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E are displayed as white light and the button LED 62 of the push button 31B is lit. , prompts the operation of the push button 31B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-26(C), an effect image Z62 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable body display Z200. Then, if any of the patterns (PS-2 to PS-4) is determined in the development suggestion production type determination process of step 241SGS280, as shown in FIG. 14-26(D), the push button 31B during the operation validity period The effect image Z62 is enlarged in accordance with the repeated tapping operation (the number of detected operations), and the color of the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E is changed every time a predetermined period of time elapses. Suggests that B is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-26(E), a blackout display is performed in which the background image is darkened while maintaining the luminescent display colors of the luminescent display sections Z208A to Z208E even after the valid operation period ends. Thereafter, a small-sized character image Z310 having the same color as the luminescent display color of the luminescent display sections Z208A to Z208E when the operation validity period ends is displayed at the upper position of the second pseudo movable body display Z200, and the character image Z310 is also displayed. After displaying the effect image Z63 for emphasis (see Figure 14-26 (F)), temporarily erase the character image Z310 while displaying the effect image Z63 (see Figure 14-26 (G)), and then After displaying the large size character image Z310 (see Figure 14-26 (H)), erase the character image Z310 while displaying the effect image Z63 (see Figure 14-26 (I)), and then Character image Z310 is displayed (see FIG. 14-26 (J)).

Note that in FIGS. 14-26(E) to (J), in consideration of the appearance of the effect, it is preferable that the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E continue to display light, but the effect image Z62 is not displayed.

In this way, the character image Z310 of the same color as the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E is displayed in a manner that gradually becomes larger from the back side of the screen toward the front side of the screen, and the character image Z310 of small size, medium size, and large size is displayed. As shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 14-26(J) in FIG. 14-27, the second pseudo-movable object display is displayed in the area including the first specific effect display position of the second pseudo-movable object display Z200. By overlapping at least a portion of Z200 on the near side and making it possible to see the second pseudo movable object display Z200 through the overlapping area, expectations for the execution of the development performance B are more preferably created. can be stimulated.

Furthermore, since the character image Z310 is displayed preferentially in front of the second pseudo-movable object display Z200, the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is erased without being moved to the first specific initial display position. While distracting the player's consciousness, it is possible to suitably suggest that the development effect B will be executed by displaying the character image Z310.

Furthermore, although the character image Z310 is displayed in a manner that increases its size in stages, at least the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is enlarged in the area including the first specific effect display position of the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 from the start of display. It may be displayed so as to partially overlap on the near side. Furthermore, the effect image Z63 may also be displayed as a suggestion image so as to overlap at least a portion of the second pseudo movable body display Z200.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-27(A), while displaying the large-sized character image Z310, the effect control CPU 120 moves the second pseudo movable object display Z200 from the first specific effect display position to the first position. 1. Erase (hide) without moving to a specific initial display position. Specifically, the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is hidden in a manner of gradually fading out as an erased display to emphasize that it has been erased. Thereafter, the large-sized character image Z310 is erased by being hidden from display in a manner of gradually fading out.

In the feature section 241SG, as shown in FIG. 14-27(A), the effect control CPU 120 controls the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 to perform the first specific effect while displaying the large-sized character image Z310. Although a mode in which the display position is moved from the display position to the first specific initial display position and is erased (hidden) without being displayed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIG. 14-26 (F) When the display of the character image Z310 is started, or when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the display, the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is displayed as the first specific effect while the character image Z310 is being displayed. It may also be erased (hidden) without being moved from the position to the first specific initial display position.

Further, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is not limited to the one where the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is erased (hidden) without being moved from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position, and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 While Z200 is faded out, it may be moved from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position and erased (hidden).

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 14-27(B), at the start timing of the development effect B, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position. Here, if non-execution of the development effect B is determined in the development effect B type determination process of step 241SGS281, as shown in FIG. 14-27(C), the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is Moves from the initial display position to the first specific effect display position and erases it without displaying it, and displays the reach title image Z51, which will be described later, in a predetermined manner (for example, the manner at the start of display with high transmittance and low visibility). By doing so, it will be announced that it will develop into a strong super reach.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14-27(D), when the execution of the advanced effect B is determined, the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position. By doing so, it will be announced that it will develop into a strong super reach. At this time, as shown in the enlarged view, the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E are displayed in a predetermined color (for example, white) during the moving display, and the rotating display part Z207 including the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E is displayed. Displayed in a clockwise manner when viewed from the front. Furthermore, an effect image Z65 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the first specific effect display position.

Note that the light-emitting display colors of the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E in FIG. 14-27(D) are different from the development suggestion effect and do not indicate the expectation level of a jackpot, but are displayed on the image display device 5 as images of a weak reach effect. The light emitting display color corresponds to the color of the effect image Z65 etc. displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-27(E), after displaying the reach title image Z51, which will be described later, in a predetermined manner (for example, the manner at the start of display with high transmittance and low visibility), As shown in 27(F), the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position and is erased (hidden) without being displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-28(A), when the variable display mode is set to the super reach display mode, the performance control CPU 120 displays a reach title indicating the type of super reach effect and a reach title indicating the jackpot expectation level. The title image Z51 is displayed to notify that the super reach effect has developed. Next, a super reach performance (for example, a performance that displays an image Z52 of a battle between an ally character and an enemy character) is started (see FIG. 14-28(B)). Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the super reach display mode has been set, if patterns KB-1 and KB-2 have been determined in the decision performance type determination process of step 241SGS282, that is, if the operation target is a push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 14-28(C), an operation promotion image Z53 is displayed to encourage the player to press the push button 31B. On the other hand, if patterns KV-1 and KV-2 are determined in the final effect type determination process in step 241SGS282, that is, if the operation target is the stick controller 31A, as shown in FIG. 14-28 (D). An operation promotion image Z54 is displayed to encourage the player to pull the stick controller 31A.

The timing when a push operation of the push button 31B (detection signal from the push sensor 35B) or a pull operation of the stick controller 31A (detection signal from the stick controller 31A) is detected during the operation validity period during which the operation promotion display is displayed, or a push If the variable display result is a jackpot at the timing when the valid operation period ends without detecting the push operation of the button 31B or the pull operation of the stick controller 31A, as shown in FIG. 14-29(E), the mounted movable body 32 A movable body performance is executed in which the object is dropped from the origin position to a performance position on the front side of the display area, and an effect image Z55 is displayed. In addition, in accordance with the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the production position, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the mounted movable body LED 208 is colored in a predetermined color (for example, rainbow color, etc.). Make it emit light.

Note that the effect image Z55 is an effect image that includes a plurality of glass shard images that are displayed in the manner of glass cracking and scattering, and is exemplified in a form similar to the effect image Z71 described later. The present invention is not limited to this, and the effect image may have a different form from the effect image Z71. For example, by displaying a display in which only a portion of the glass is cracked and scattered as fragments, leaving the remaining portion, the mounted movable body 32 may be displayed overlappingly with the effect image Z55 displayed on the image display device 5. Even in situations where it is difficult to visually recognize, it may be possible to make it easier for the player to understand what has happened by taking some time.

Further, in the effect image Z55, as well as the effect image Z71 described later, at least one of the plurality of glass fragment images displayed in a scattering manner includes the mounting movable body 32 disposed on the front side of the image display device 5. By displaying a part of the glass fragments in a reflective manner, the positional relationship between the mounted movable body 32 and the glass fragment image becomes clearer, so that a display with a more three-dimensional effect can be realized.

After that, after moving the mounted movable body 32 from the production position to the origin position, as shown in FIG. 14-29 (F), after displaying the image Z56 indicating that the ally character has won the battle with the enemy character. , as shown in FIG. 14-29(G), the combination of jackpot symbols is temporarily stopped and the jackpot confirmed notification is performed. Incidentally, even if the combination of jackpot symbols is temporarily stopped and displayed, the small symbols remain variably displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-30(A), the effect control CPU 120 displays an effect image Z71 in which glass is cracked and glass fragments are scattered in the display area of the image display device 5, and the first pseudo movable The body display Z100 is displayed at the first initial display position. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-30(B), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and the effect movable display parts Z110A to Z110D are displayed as the first effect. The display state is changed to the second effect display state. In addition, in response to the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, the mounted movable body 32 is dropped in the same manner as in FIG. 14-29 (E). Then, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the light emitting display section Z108A is caused to emit light in a predetermined color (for example, rainbow color).

Here, details of the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position explained in FIGS. 14-30(A) and (B) are shown in FIG. 14-31. explain.

As shown in FIG. 14-31(A), the production control CPU 120 displays an effect image Z71 in the display area of the image display device 5, including an image Z71A showing a state in which glass is cracked and a plurality of glass fragments are scattered. At the same time, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is displayed at the first initial display position. Note that the performance control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 so that a portion thereof is visible below the mounted movable body 32 held at the origin position. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-31(B), when displaying the first pseudo movable object display Z100 at the first intermediate display position between the first initial display position and the first effect display position, -31(A), the amount and moving display speed of the image Z71A showing glass fragments are increased, and the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is displayed on the near side of these images Z71A.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 14-31(C) and (D), when displaying the first pseudo movable object display Z100 at the first effect display position, the glass fragments are smaller than in the state shown in FIG. 14-31(B). The amount and movement display speed of the images Z71A showing the image Z71A are further increased, and these images Z71A are displayed closer than the first pseudo movable body display Z100.

In this way, in response to the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100, the effect image Z71 for emphasizing the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is added to the first initial display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100. position, the first intermediate display position, and the first effect display position, and move only the image Z71A showing the glass fragments in the effect image Z71 from the back side to the front side of the first pseudo movable object display Z100. By displaying it, not only can a three-dimensional effect be created by the image Z71A in a manner of scattering around it, but also it is possible to make the first pseudo movable object display Z100 look like a real structure.

Further, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 14-31(C), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is viewed through any one of the plurality of images Z71A displayed on the front side of the first pseudo movable body display Z100. The first pseudo-movable body display may be displayed in a visible manner, or may be displayed on any one of the plurality of images Z71A displayed on the front side of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 14-31(D). By displaying a part of Z100 in a reflective manner, the positional relationship between the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the image Z71A becomes clearer, so that a display with a more three-dimensional effect can be realized.

Further, as shown in FIG. 14-31(D), the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first performance position, and then moves the performance movable display parts Z110A to Z110D to the first performance display. At the same time, the light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the light emission display of the light emission display section Z108A are executed at approximately the same cycle.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-32, after the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 moves to the first effect display position, the effect control CPU 120 controls the light-emitting display part Z108A during the first period ta1 to ta2 ( For example, during the production period in which the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 is displayed at the first production display position, a flashing display pattern in which the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 is displayed in the first production display position is a flashing display pattern in which the display is emitted for a period of 33ms) and then is not displayed for a second period ta2 to ta3 (for example, 33ms). While repeating ta1 to ta4 multiple times, the mounted movable body LED 208 is turned on for a first corresponding period (for example, 30 ms) corresponding to the first period, and then a second corresponding period corresponding to the second period (for example, A blinking pattern in which the lights go out for 40 ms) is repeated multiple times over the presentation period ta1 to ta4.

In this way, by executing (synchronizing) the light emission of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the light emission display of the light emission display section Z108A at substantially the same period (synchronization), it is possible to more suitably enhance the performance. It should be noted that it is difficult to accurately match (synchronize) the time (for example, 33 ms) in which the light emitting display section Z108A emits light and the time (for example, 30 ms) to light up the mounted movable body LED 208 in the first period ta1 to ta2. Even in such a case, for example, by making the off period of the mounted movable body LED 208 longer than the lighting period, the discrepancy between the light emission display of the light emitting display section Z108A and the lighting of the mounted movable body LED 208 will increase over time. This can be prevented.

Further, during the performance period ta1 to ta4, a vibration performance may be performed in which the vibration motor 61 is driven to vibrate the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A. By doing so, the performance can be made more exciting. Note that the driving of the vibration motor 61 may be synchronized with the light emission display of the light emission display section Z108A and the lighting of the mounted movable body LED 208.

Returning to FIG. 14-30(C), the performance control CPU 120 returns the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the second performance display state to the first performance display state, and ends the reduced display of the decorative pattern. , after temporary stop display in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved upward and displayed as shown in FIG. 14-30 (D). As shown in E), the display is moved to the first effect display position and then erased. Then, the combination of determined decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and the small symbols are also stopped and displayed in the combination of jackpot symbols.

In this way, after performing the effect of dropping the mounted movable body 32 and notifying the jackpot confirmation, by executing the effect of moving and displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100, the jackpot game state is controlled. It is possible to make the player feel it more suitably.

Returning to FIG. 14-29, during the operation validity period during which the operation promotion display is displayed, a single press operation of the push button 31B (detection signal from the push sensor 35B) or a single pull operation of the stick controller 31A (a single pull operation from the stick controller 31A) If the variable display result is incorrect at the timing when the detection signal) is detected, or at the timing when the valid operation period ends without detecting a single push operation of the push button 31B or a single pull operation of the stick controller 31A, the variable display result is off, as shown in Figure 14-29. As shown in (H), the effect image Z57 is displayed without performing the movable body effect of dropping the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position above the display area of the image display device 5 to the effect position on the front side of the display area, As shown in Figure 14-29 (I), after displaying the image Z58 indicating that the friendly character has lost the battle with the enemy character, the combination of losing symbols is displayed as shown in Figure 14-29 (J). A stop display is performed to notify the failure confirmation. Further, in synchronization with the stop display of the combination of missed symbols, the small symbols are stopped and displayed as the combination of missed symbols.

Note that, for example, when the push button 31B is operated at the start of the valid operation period, and when the push button 31B is not operated during the valid operation period, there will be a difference in the subsequent length, so the operation timing of the push button 31B will be different. The difference in scale caused by 1. The period of fluctuation of the decorative pattern until the pattern is confirmed; 2. Display period of images Z55 to Z58, 3. This may be absorbed by extending or shortening one of the presentation periods of the movable body presentation.

(Example of Super Reach γ production operation)
Next, an example of the performance operation of super reach γ will be explained based on FIGS. 14-33 to 14-34. FIGS. 14-33 (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of the performance operation of preview performance B in super reach γ. FIGS. 14-34 (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of the performance operation of the preview performance B in the super reach γ.

Below, we will explain an example of the performance operation of preview performance B executed in the normal reach performance in the variation pattern of super reach γ, and the flow from the start of the variable display to the start of the normal reach performance is the same as that of super reach β. Therefore, the explanation will be omitted. Note that the super reach γ is a variation pattern that is selected only when the gaming state is a high base state.

As shown in FIG. 14-33(A), if the pattern PYB-1 is determined in the preview performance type determination process at step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance control CPU 120 to display a preview after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode. At the start timing of effect B, after displaying the second pseudo movable object display Z200 at the second specific initial display position, by moving and displaying it to the second intermediate effect display position (see Figure 14-33 (B)), a jackpot can be achieved. A preview performance B indicating that the game state will be controlled is executed. Further, an effect image Z81 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moved and displayed at the second intermediate effect display position.

The second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed overlappingly in front of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5L at the second intermediate effect display position, so that the second pseudo movable body display Z200 can be displayed in a variable manner in the decorative pattern display area 5L. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the displayed decorative pattern.

After that, as shown in FIG. 14-33(C), the effect control CPU 120 erases (deactivates) the second pseudo movable object display Z200 without moving it from the second intermediate effect display position to the second specific initial display position. indicate.

As shown in FIG. 14-33 (D), if the pattern PYB-2 is determined in the preview performance type determination process at step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance control CPU 120 when the pattern PYB-2 is determined in the preview performance type determination process at step 241SGS278B. At the start timing of effect B, after displaying the second pseudo movable object display Z200 at the second specific initial display position, by moving and displaying it to the second specific effect display position (see Figure 14-33 (E)), a jackpot is achieved. A preview performance B indicating that the game state will be controlled is executed. Furthermore, an effect image Z81 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moved and displayed at the second specific effect display position.

The second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is displayed overlappingly in front of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5C at the second specific effect display position, so that the second pseudo movable body display Z200 can be displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5C. It becomes difficult to visually recognize the displayed decorative pattern.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 14-33(F), the effect control CPU 120 erases (deactivates) the second pseudo movable body display Z200 without moving it from the second specific effect display position to the second specific initial display position. indicate.

As shown in FIG. 14-34(A), if the pattern PYB-3 is determined in the preview performance type determination process at step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance control CPU 120 to display a preview after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode. At the start timing of performance B, after displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100 at the first initial display position, by moving and displaying it to the first performance display position (see FIG. 14-34 (B)), a jackpot game state is created. Preview performance B is executed, which suggests that the system will be controlled by Furthermore, an effect image Z82 for emphasizing the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed around the first pseudo movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the first effect display position.

The first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed overlappingly in front of the decorative patterns that are variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at the first effect display position. , 5C, and 5R are partially difficult to visually recognize.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 14-34(C), the effect control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first effect display position to the first initial display position and erases (hides) the display without displaying it. do.

As shown in FIG. 14-34(D), if the pattern PYB-4 is determined in the preview performance type determination process at step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance control CPU 120 to display a preview after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode. At the start timing of performance B, after displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 at the second initial display position, by moving and displaying it to the second performance display position (see FIG. 14-34 (E)), a jackpot game state is established. Preview performance B is executed, which suggests that the system will be controlled by Furthermore, an effect image Z82 for emphasizing the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed around the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moved and displayed at the second effect display position.

The first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is overlapped and displayed in front of the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at the second effect display position, so that the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5L. , 5C, and 5R are partially difficult to visually recognize.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 14-34(F), the effect control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 from the second effect display position to the second initial display position and erases (hides) it without displaying it. do.

(Pseudo moving object display and moving object)
Next, pseudo movable object display and movable objects will be explained based on FIGS. 14-35 to 14-40. FIG. 14-35 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display and the non-mounted movable body. FIG. 14-36 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display and the non-mounted movable body. FIG. 14-37 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display and the non-mounted movable body. FIG. 14-38 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display and the non-mounted movable body. FIG. 14-39 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display and the non-mounted movable body. FIG. 14-40 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the first pseudo movable object display and the second pseudo movable object display.

As shown in FIG. 14-35, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is a first non-movable body display Z100 that is different in shape, weight, drive mechanism, etc. from the mounted movable body 32, as explained in FIG. 14-14(B). Although this is a pseudo movable body display imitating the mounted movable body M100, the first initial display position and the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 are both approximately at the same position at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, and the first effect display position Since both the effect position of the mounted movable body 32 are lower than the first initial display position and the origin position, the direction of movement from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 is the origin The direction of movement from the position to the production position is a common downward direction. That is, both the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the mounted movable body 32 are movable downward from the first initial display position or origin position above the display area of the image display device 5.

As explained in FIGS. 14-16, the moving display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position is the distance from the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 to the effect position. It is longer than the moving distance L1 (L2>L1).

Here, as shown in FIGS. 14-35 (A') to (C'), the mounted movable body 32 falls (moves) under its own weight from the upper origin position to the lower production position via the intermediate position. While it takes about 300 ms, as shown in FIGS. 14-35 (A) to (C), the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is displayed from the first initial display position to the first intermediate display position and then to the first effect display. It takes about 100ms to move and display the position. In other words, the moving display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is longer than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position, in addition to the longer moving display distance. It's also fast.

In this way, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100 is displayed as a movable mounted structure movable in the same direction (for example, downward) as the first non-mounted movable body M100. In the case where the movable display can be performed from approximately the same position as the mounted movable body 32 in the same direction, the movable display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is better than that of the mounted movable body 32. By making the movement faster than the movement from the origin position to the performance position, it is possible to perform an impactful performance that is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 that is actually mounted, thereby surprising the player. be able to.

Next, as shown in FIGS. 14-36 (A') and (B'), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first origin position to the first presentation position below the first origin position. At times, the mechanical part M100B comes into contact with the upper part of the movable body M106 and its downward movement is restricted, causing it to stop, and the vibration generated when the movement is restricted causes a reaction motion (bounce) of a predetermined amount of movement. The display is designed to imitate the first non-mounted movable body M100 where the process is performed.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 14-36(A) and (B), the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo movable object display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100. When stopping and displaying at the effect display position, a reaction movement display (bounce display) of a specific amount of movement is performed.

More specifically, the first non-mounted movable body M100 has a cantilevered structure in which only the left side of the production section M100A is supported by the drive mechanism M101, and when it moves to the first production position, the mechanism section M100B moves to the moving body M106. Since the mechanism part M100B comes into contact with the upper part of the production part M100A and is restricted from moving downward, a reaction motion due to vibration occurs in the mechanism part M100B before the production part M100A, and then the vibration is transmitted to the production part M100A and a reaction action occurs.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 14-36 (B1), when the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position, after displaying the reaction movement of the mechanism part M100B. , as shown in FIG. 14-36 (B2), displays the reaction motion of the production section M100A. By doing so, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100, which is different from the mounted movable body 32, is displayed in a more realistic manner (for example, the display imitating the mounted movable body 32 is can be moved and displayed in different modes).

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 14-36 (C') and (D'), the mounted movable body 32 has a structure in which the left and right sides of the production section 32A are supported by drive mechanisms 101L and 101R, and is moved to the production position. At this time, the mechanism portion 32B comes into contact with the upper portions of the left and right movable bodies 206 and their downward movement is restricted, so that a reaction movement of a predetermined amount of movement is performed due to vibrations generated when the movement is restricted.

Next, the operation mode of the mounted movable body 32 and the first pseudo movable body in the deciding performance will be explained.

As explained in FIGS. 14-28 to 14-30, the performance control CPU 120 performs a movable body performance that causes the mounted movable body 32 to fall from the origin position to the performance position during the execution period (ta0 to ta10) of the final performance. After executing and notifying the jackpot confirmation, it is possible to execute a pseudo movable object display in which the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-37(A), after starting the determined performance at timing ta0, the performance control CPU 120 controls whether the player operates the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B within the valid operation period. At the detected timing ta1, the mounted movable body 32 is dropped from the origin position to the production position. The mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the presentation position during a period TL1 (for example, about 300 ms) between timings ta1 and ta2, and then performs a reaction motion during a period between timings ta2 and ta3 (for example, about 700 ms).

Thereafter, at timing ta4, the mounted movable body 32 is moved (raised) from the performance position to the origin position, and a jackpot confirmation notification is performed. Here, the period TL3 (for example, about 1000 ms) from timing ta4 to ta5 when the mounted movable body 32 moves from the production position to the origin position is the period from timing ta1 to ta2 when the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the production position. It is longer than TL1 (for example, about 300 ms). In other words, the speed at which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the production position to the origin position is slower than the speed at which the mounted movable body 32 moves (falls) from the origin position to the production position.

In this way, in a performance using the mounted movable body 32, which is a structure, when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the performance position in response to the detection of the player's operation, the game is performed by making it fall faster due to its own weight. On the other hand, when moving the mounted movable body 32 from the performance position to the origin position, it is possible to suppress damage to the mounted movable body 32 due to impact by moving it slowly.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo movable object display Z100 at the first initial display position at timing ta6 when a predetermined time has elapsed since the notification of jackpot confirmation, and displays the first pseudo movable object display Z100 at the first initial display position, and displays the first pseudo movable object display Z100 at the first initial display position during the period TL2 from timing ta6 to ta7 (for example, , about 100 ms), and then a reaction movement display is performed during a period from timing ta7 to ta8 (for example, about 900 ms).

Thereafter, at timing ta9, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved (raised) from the first effect display position to the first initial display position, and then the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is erased. Here, during the period TL4 (for example, about 1000 ms) from timing ta9 to ta10 during which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first effect display position to the first initial display position, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved to the first It is longer than the period TL2 (for example, about 100 ms) from timing ta6 to ta7 of moving and displaying from the initial display position to the first effect display position. In other words, the speed at which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first effect display position to the first initial display position is such that the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display It is slower than the speed when moving to the position and displaying it.

In this way, in the moving display of the first pseudo-movable object display Z100, the moving display from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is made faster than the moving display from the first effect display position to the first initial display position. By doing the same as the mounted movable body 32, such as increasing the speed, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-37(B), the amount of movement per unit time (for example, TL2) when moving and displaying the first pseudo movable object display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position Comparing L2 (movement display distance L2) with the movement amount L1A per unit time (for example, TL2) when moving the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the production position, it is found that the first pseudo movable body display Z100 The movement amount L2 per unit time TL2 is larger than the movement amount L1A of the mounted movable body 32 per unit time TL2. In other words, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the effect position. By doing so, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can perform an impactful performance that is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32, which can surprise the player.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-37(C), the amount of movement of the first reaction action display performed when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. L12 is larger than the movement amount L11 of the first reaction motion display performed when the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the production position. Further, the number of times the reaction motion of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed (for example, six times) is greater than the number of times of reaction motion of the mounted movable body 32 (for example, four times). In this way, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can simulate the same effect as the first non-mounted movable body M100 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100. By displaying the reaction motion that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first performance position in an exaggerated manner, it is possible to provide a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 14-38(A) and (B), the movement display distance L2 of the first pseudo movable object display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and the movement display distance L2 of the first pseudo movable object display Z100 The moving display distance L2 of M100 from the first origin position to the first effect display position is the same, and the period TL2 during which the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is: It is shorter than the period TL10 during which the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first production position (TL2<TL10). Therefore, the amount of movement L2 per unit time (for example, TL2) when moving and displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is as follows: It is larger than the amount of movement per unit time (for example, TL2) when moving from the first origin position to the first presentation position. In other words, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is better than the movement display of the first non-mounted movable body M100 from the first origin position to the first effect display position. It's also fast. By doing so, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can perform an impactful performance that is faster than the movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100, which can surprise the player.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14-38(C), the amount of movement of the first reaction action display performed when the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. L12 is the movement amount L11 of the first reaction action display performed when the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the production position, and the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves from the first origin position to the first It is larger than the movement amount L13 of the first reaction movement display performed when moving and displaying to the production position. Further, the number of times the reaction motion of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed (for example, six times) is greater than the number of times of reaction motion of the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 (for example, four times). By doing so, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can simulate the same effect as the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the mounted movable body 32 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100. In addition, by displaying in an exaggerated manner the reaction motion that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first performance position or when the mounted movable body 32 moves to the performance position, the game It is possible to provide a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the audience.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, the comparison between the predetermined movement amount in the reaction motion of the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the specific movement amount in the reaction motion display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is as follows. Although the first reaction movement and the reaction movement display were compared, it is also possible to compare any reaction movement from the second time onward with the reaction movement display, or the total or average movement amount of multiple reaction movements and the reaction movement. It may also be compared with the displayed total or average movement amount.

In addition, the reaction motion is an example in which the movable body jumps upward due to the reaction when it stops at the second position, but it also includes deformation or vibration of a predetermined part of the movable body due to the reaction. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-39(A), when moving the mounted movable body 32 from the production position to the origin position, or when moving the first non-mounted movable body M100 from the first production position to the first origin position. In this case, since drive sources such as the mounted movable body motors 202L, 202R and M101 are used, the performance control CPU 120 changes the control speed of the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 from the timing tb1 when movement is started. The first period up to tb2 is increased, the period from timing tb2 to timing tb3 is constant, and the second period from timing tb3 to timing tb4 is decreased. In other words, the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 accelerate until a first period elapses after starting movement, then move at a constant speed, and decelerate in a second period before the stop position. Stop.

On the other hand, the speed at which the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 are moved and displayed is from timing tb1 when they start moving to timing tb4 when they stop, as shown in FIG. 14-39(B). Since the first period for accelerating the movement display and the second period for decelerating the movement display are not necessary, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is changed to the first non-mounted movable body M100. This can be performed more smoothly than the movement of the mounting movable body 32.

Next, the movement display of the first pseudo movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo movable object display Z200 will be explained using FIG. 14-40.

As shown in FIGS. 14-40 (A) to (C), when creating a video in which the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, at least the first A first frame that is an input image for displaying the movable body display Z100 at the first initial display position, and a second frame that is an input image for displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100 at the first effect display position. , is required.

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 14-40 (A') to (B'), when creating a video in which the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position. , at least a first frame that is an input image for displaying the second pseudo movable body display Z200 at the first specific initial display position, and a first frame that is an input image for displaying the second pseudo movable body display Z200 at the first specific effect display position. A second frame, which is an input image, is required.

As explained in FIG. 14-16, the moving display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position is the first specified movement distance of the second pseudo movable body display Z200. The moving display distance L3 is from the initial display position to the first specific effect display position, and although the moving display distance L2 is longer than the moving display distance L3, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first effect. The time required to move and display the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position is approximately 100 ms, while the time required to move and display the display to the display position is approximately 100 ms. Since the difference is 800 ms, the moving display from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position is better than the movement display from the first specific initial display position of the second pseudo movable body display Z200. 1 Faster than the moving display to the specific effect display position.

Here, when the effect control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, the first frame shown in FIG. Although it is possible to display the images in the order of the second frame shown in 40(C), the frame rate would be lower and the movement would be choppy and unnatural.

Therefore, one interpolation frame shown in FIG. 14-40(B) is inserted between the first frame and the second frame as an input image for displaying the first pseudo movable object display Z100 at the first intermediate display position. The number of frames of the video is increased to increase the frame rate, and the moving display of the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is performed for each display frame at the first initial display position, By performing this in the order of the first intermediate display position and the first effect display position, a natural and smooth moving display can be performed.

In this way, even when moving and displaying the first pseudo movable object display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position at high speed, at least one interpolation frame is inserted between the first frame and the second frame. By realizing a natural and smooth moving display, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 can be quickly moved and displayed without reducing visibility.

On the other hand, when the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the second pseudo movable object display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, the first frame shown in FIG. 14-40 (A'), Although displaying the frames in the order of the second frame shown in FIG. 14-40 (B') may be considered, the frame rate would be lower and the movement would be jerky and unnatural.

Therefore, between the first frame and the second frame, the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is displayed at a plurality of first intermediate display positions between the first specific initial display position and the first specific effect display position. A plurality of interpolation frames (not shown) are inserted as input images to increase the number of frames of the video and increase the frame rate to achieve a natural and smooth moving display, and the first identification of the second pseudo movable object display Z200 By performing a moving display from the initial display position to the first specific effect display position in the order of the first specific initial display position, each first intermediate display position, and the first specific effect display position for each display frame, the second The pseudo movable body display Z200 can be displayed moving at a speed slower than the first pseudo movable body display Z100 without reducing visibility.

Also, for example, in the preview performance B, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, or from the second initial display position to the second performance display position. When the moving display PBY-4 is executed, the second pseudo movable object display Z200 moves and is displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position or the second intermediate effect display position. 1. When PBY-2 is executed, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot state (jackpot expectation level) is different, so the first pseudo movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo movable object display have different ratios of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state. The player can recognize the pseudo movable object display Z200 by the difference in speed of the moving display.

In addition, a pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and PBY-4 in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the second initial display position to the second effect display position. When is executed, patterns PBY-1 and PBY-2 in which the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position or the second intermediate effect display position are executed. Since the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot state (jackpot expectation level) is higher than when the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is executed, attention can be drawn to the moving display of the first pseudo movable object display Z100.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, when the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position on the image display device 5 and is stopped and displayed at the first effect display position, Although a form in which a reaction movement display (rebound display) of a predetermined amount of movement is displayed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in FIGS. 14-34 (D) to (E), image display When the device 5 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the second initial display position to the second effect display position and stops and displays it at the second effect display position, a reaction movement display of a predetermined movement amount ( (bounce display) may also be performed.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 14-33(A) and (B), the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position on the image display device 5. When stopping and displaying at the second intermediate effect display position, or as shown in FIGS. When moving and displaying from the second specific performance display position to the second specific performance display position and stopping display at the second specific performance display position, a reaction movement display (bounce display) of a predetermined movement amount may be performed.

In addition, the reaction action display performed when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moves from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate effect display position or the second specific effect display position in the preview effect B is better than the reaction movement display that is performed during the preview effect B. It is preferable that the amount of movement is larger than the reaction movement display performed when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position in the effect A. By doing so, the moving amount of the preview effect B is larger than that of the preview effect A, so that it can be moved and displayed in a more realistic manner.

In addition, the reaction action display that is performed when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first performance display position after notification of the jackpot of the pattern PBY-3 of the preview performance B or the decisive performance. However, it is preferable that the amount of movement is larger than the reaction movement display performed when the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the second initial display position to the second effect display position in pattern PBY-4 of preview effect B. . By doing so, the reaction motion display is larger when the display is moved downward than when it is displayed while moving upward, so that the display can be moved in a more realistic manner.

(action/effect)
As explained above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 241SG, the direction in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first presentation position, and the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position The direction of movement from to the production position is a common downward direction, and the movement amount L2 per unit time TL2 of the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is greater than the movement amount L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable object 32. big.
According to this feature, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can perform an impactful performance that is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32, thereby surprising the player.
Furthermore, it is possible to move and display at a speed that is difficult to achieve with the mounted movable body 32, or to move and display at a plurality of speeds, so it is possible to diversify the effects.

Although the feature section 241SG exemplifies a mode in which the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the movement speed of the mounted movable body 32 are compared, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first It may be a comparison between the movement display of the pseudo movable body display Z100 and the movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100, or a comparison between the movement display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 and the movement of the second non-mounted movable body M200. It may also be a comparison of speed with movement. In other words, if the speed of the moving display of the pseudo movable body display and the movement of the movable body are compared, the types of the pseudo movable body display and the movable body to be compared may be arbitrarily changed.

In addition, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is a display imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100 that performs a reaction motion of a predetermined amount of movement when it moves from the first origin position to the first performance position, and The control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo movable body display Z100 up and down between the first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and the first effect display position corresponding to the first effect position on the image display device 5. When moving and displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and stopping and displaying it at the first effect display position, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 can be displayed by moving in a predetermined movement amount. A reaction movement display (bounce display) is performed, and the movement amount L12 of the first reaction movement display is performed when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. is larger than the movement amount L13 of the first reaction motion display performed when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves and displays from the first origin position to the first effect position.
According to this feature, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can simulate the same effect as the first non-mounted movable body M100 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100, and By displaying the reaction motion that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first performance position in an exaggerated manner, it is possible to provide a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

In addition, although the feature section 241SG exemplifies a form in which the reaction movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the movement amount of the reaction movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100 are compared, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be a comparison between the reaction movement display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 and the movement amount of the reaction movement of the second non-mounted movable body M200, or the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body It may be a comparison between the reaction movement display of display Z200 and the reaction movement of the mounted movable body 32. In other words, when comparing the movement amount between the reaction motion display of the pseudo movable body display and the reaction motion of the movable body, the type of the pseudo movable body display and the movable body to be compared may be arbitrarily changed.

Further, during the variable display period of the symbol based on the variation pattern of super reach β or super reach γ, development effect A using the mounted movable body 32 and development effect B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are executed. In this case, the ratio of being controlled to a jackpot game state (jackpot expectation level) is higher than when the development performance B is executed without the development performance A being executed.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the developed performance A, which is a movable body performance, and the developed performance B, which is a pseudo movable body display performance, are executed.
It should be noted that when the development effect A using the mounted movable body 32 and the development effect B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are executed, the development effect B is executed without the development effect A being executed. The phrase "the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state is higher than when the game is executed" includes the case where the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state is 100% when the advanced performance A and the advanced performance B are executed.

In addition, there is a preview effect A that foretells the possibility (expectation level) of the variable display result becoming a jackpot, a development effect B that informs that the result will develop into a strong super reach effect, and a suggestion that the development effect B will be executed. In the preview performance A, after moving and displaying the second pseudo movable object display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, the first specific performance display can be executed. from the position to the first specific initial display position and then hide it, and in the developed effect B, after displaying the second pseudo movable body display Z200 at the first specific effect display position, from the first specific effect display position It is hidden without moving to the first specific initial display position, and the second pseudo movable object display Z200, which is displayed at the first specific initial display position before the execution of the development effect B, is hidden. At this time, the character image Z310 can be displayed in the display area including the first specific effect display position.
According to this feature, in the preview performance A, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed moving in the same way as a movable body as a structure, so it is possible to control the second pseudo movable body display Z200 to an advantageous state without giving the player a sense of discomfort. On the other hand, in the development suggestion effect, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 gives priority to the display of the character image Z310 over moving and displaying it in the same way as the movable body, and moves from the first specific effect display position. Since it is hidden without returning to the first specific initial display position, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the suggestion of execution of the advanced effect B.

In addition, it is possible to perform a deciding performance that informs whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled, and a developing performance B that notifies that the determining performance will be executed after developing into a strong super reach performance. When moving and displaying the second pseudo movable body display Z200 in B, after moving and displaying the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, the first specific effect display The reach title image Z51 is moved from the position to the first specific initial display position and is hidden without being displayed, and the display area including the first specific effect display position is changed to display the reach title image Z51 that suggests the execution of the advanced effect B. When moving and displaying the first pseudo movable object display Z100 in a fixed effect, after moving and displaying the first pseudo movable object display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, the corresponding The display is moved from the first effect display position to the first initial display position and then hidden.
According to this feature, before the decisive effect is executed, the second pseudo movable object display Z200 gives priority to displaying the suggestion image over moving and displaying it in the same way as a movable object as a structure. Since the display is hidden without returning from the position to the first display position, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the suggestion of execution of the decisive performance, while in the decisive performance, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is the same as the movable Since the information is displayed in a moving manner, it is possible to draw attention to the information that is advantageous to the player without giving the player a sense of discomfort.
In addition, the feature section 241SG exemplifies a form in which the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is moved and displayed in the developed effect B (specific effect), and the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed in the final effect (special effect). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a common pseudo movable object display may be moved between the specific performance and the special performance.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays the movement of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position for each display frame, at the first initial display position, at the first intermediate display position, and at the first intermediate display position. and the first effect display position, and a specific image ( For example, it is possible to display an effect image Z71) in which glass is cracked and an image Z71A showing a plurality of glass fragments is scattered.
According to this feature, the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 can be quickly moved and displayed without reducing visibility, and the moving display can be emphasized by a specific image to give a favorable impression to the player. Can be attached.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays the movement of the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position for each display frame, at the first initial display position, at the first intermediate display position, and at the first intermediate display position. and the first effect display position, and the moving display from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first effect display position is the first specific initial display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200. A pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position in the preview effect B faster than the moving display from the position to the first specific effect display position. When PBY-4, which is moved and displayed from the second initial display position to the second effect display position, is executed, and when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moves from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position or The rate at which the jackpot state is controlled (jackpot expectation level) differs depending on when the patterns PBY-1 and PBY-2 that are moved and displayed at the intermediate effect display position are executed.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which of the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is displayed in a moving manner, and the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is different. The player can recognize the first pseudo movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo movable object display Z200 by the difference in the speed of the moving display.
In addition, in the preview performance B, a pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed moving from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, and a pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed moving from the second initial display position to the second performance display position When the pattern PBY-4 is executed, and when the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is executed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific effect display position or the second intermediate effect display position, a jackpot is achieved. The ratio of being controlled by the state (jackpot expectation level) is different when the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot state is 100% when pattern PBY-3 or pattern PBY-4 is executed in preview performance B, and pattern PBY- When the percentage of the game being controlled to the jackpot gaming state when 1 or pattern PBY-2 is executed is 0%, or when the pattern PBY-1 or pattern PBY-2 is being executed in advance presentation B, it is controlled to the jackpot state. This includes a case where the percentage of winning is 100% and the percentage of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state when pattern PBY-3 or PBY-4 is executed is 0%.

In addition, by making the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 display images having not only effect display parts Z100A and Z200A but also mechanism display parts Z100B and Z200B, etc., movable objects operated by a drive mechanism can be displayed. While it is possible to realize a movable body display performance similar to the movable body display by expressing the body more realistically, regarding the moving display, it is not only possible to display the body moving in the same manner as the movable body. By enabling a moving display that is difficult to realize due to the complicated mechanism and increased cost, the interest of the performance can be suitably improved.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, as a movement display that is difficult to realize with a movable body, high-speed movement, deformed display, and returning from the effect display position to the initial display position are erased without display (hidden). However, by realistically expressing the display mode of the pseudo movable object display and unrealistically displaying the moving display, it is possible to provide an unexpected effect.

In particular, it is possible to hide or display the pseudo-movable body display that has been moved to the performance display position at a desired timing, so for example, a movable body as a structure that has been moved to the performance display position can be returned to its original position. This has the effect of increasing the degree of freedom in design of a performance, such as avoiding a decrease in visibility due to other performance images being hidden, and making it possible to immediately start the next performance. play.

Furthermore, the movement amount L12 of the first reaction action display performed when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is smaller than that of the first non-mounted movable body M100. is larger than the movement amount L13 of the first reaction motion display performed when the movement is displayed from the first origin position to the first effect position, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 causes the first non-mounted movable body M100 to move and display. It is possible to simulate the same effect as the first non-equipped movable body M100 without installing it, and also exaggerate the reaction motion that occurs when the first non-equipped movable body M100 moves to the first performance position. By displaying the game in this manner, it is possible to provide a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

In addition, since the movement display distance L2 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position is longer than the movement distance L1 from the origin position to the effect position, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is installed. Since the moving speed is faster and the moving distance is longer than that of the movable body 32, it is possible to provide a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

In addition, the pseudo movable body display includes effect display parts Z100A, Z200A and mechanism display parts Z100B, Z200B, and in the moving display of the pseudo movable body display, the mechanism display parts Z100B, Z200B are larger than the effect display parts Z100A, Z200A. By reaching the first effect display position first, the pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed in a more realistic manner.

Furthermore, the amount of movement L2 per unit time TL2 of the first pseudo movable object display Z100 is larger than the amount of movement L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable object 32, which makes the first pseudo movable object display Z100 more realistic. It can be moved and displayed in various ways.

In addition, the moving period of the mounted movable body 32 between the origin position and the production position includes a first period in which the speed increases and a second period in which the speed decreases, and the movement display of the pseudo movable body display By not including the first period and the second period, the pseudo movable object display can be moved more smoothly than the movable object.

In addition, after moving and displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance position, the performance control CPU 120 causes the mounted movable body LED 208 to emit light and the light-emitting display section Z108A to emit light at approximately the same cycle. , it is possible to draw the player's attention to the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moved and displayed at the first effect display position.

In addition, when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is being moved and displayed, the performance control CPU 120 does not display the light-emitting display part Z108A to emit light, thereby preventing the eye from seeing the incomplete first pseudo-movable body display Z100 that is being displayed in a moving manner. By not standing up, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the production effect.

In addition, after moving and displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance position, the performance control CPU 120 causes the mounted movable body LED 208 to emit light and the light-emitting display section Z108A to emit light at approximately the same cycle. , it is possible to move and display the first pseudo movable body display Z100 in a more realistic manner.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position or the second specific performance display position, and can display the second pseudo movable body display Z200 in the preview performance A. The downward direction in which the pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second specific direction in preview effect B. By being different from the right direction of moving and displaying to the effect display position, one pseudo movable object display can be moved and displayed from multiple display positions, allowing players to create unexpected effects that are difficult to achieve with movable objects. can be provided to

Further, after moving and displaying the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, the effect control CPU 120 controls the direction in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position. By being able to move and display in a direction different from the above, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance that is difficult to realize with a movable body.

(Modification 1)
Next, a first modification of the characteristic portion 241SG will be described based on FIG. 14-41. In FIG. 14-41, (A) to (D) are diagrams showing modification example 1 of the characteristic portion 241SG.

In the characteristic section 241SG, as explained in FIG. 14-25, in the preview performance A, after moving and displaying the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, An example is shown in which the display is moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position and then erased, and then, as developed performance A, the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position.

Here, as shown in FIG. 14-41(D), the movable range of the mounted movable body 32 and the movable range of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 partially overlap, that is, the mounted movable body 32 and the movable range of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 overlap. When the movable body 32 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 moved and displayed at the first specific effect display position overlap, the effect control CPU 120 moves the mounted movable body 32 to the effect position and displays the second pseudo When the moving display of the movable body display Z200 to the first specific effect display position is executed in a common period, the mounted movable body 32 overlaps on the front side of the second pseudo movable body display Z200, and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed. As it becomes difficult to visually recognize the second pseudo-movable object display Z200, it becomes easy to understand that it is a display object rather than a structure, and the interest of the performance decreases.

In such a case, as shown in FIG. 14-41(A), the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position and moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position. After being displayed (see Figure 14-41 (B)), by moving from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position and erasing it without displaying it (see Figure 14-41 (C)), As shown in -41(D), the mounted movable body 32 that has moved from the origin position to the performance position as the development effect A may be prevented from overlapping with the second pseudo movable body display Z200.

(Modification 2)
Next, a second modification of the characteristic portion 241SG will be described based on FIG. 14-42. In FIG. 14-42, (A) to (H) are diagrams showing a second modification of the characteristic portion 241SG.

In the characteristic portion 241SG, the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the production position and the direction in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves and displays from the first initial display position to the first production display position are common. Although the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the mounted movable body 401 as the second modification is in the first position and in the lower direction than the first position. a direction in which the pseudo movable object display Z402 as the second modification moves between the first display position and a second display position above the first display position; , are in a common direction (e.g., vertical direction), the moving display of the pseudo movable body display Z402 from the first display position to the second display position is better than the movement display from the first position of the mounted movable body 401 to the second display position. It just needs to be faster than moving to the location.

Also, the direction in which the mounted movable body 401 moves from the first position to the second position (downward) and the direction in which the pseudo movable body display Z402 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position (upward). and may be in different directions.

Further, in the characteristic section 241SG, the movement of the mounted movable body 32 and the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are not performed in a common period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and by performing the movement of the mounted movable body 401 and the movement display of the pseudo movable body display Z402 in a common period, as in the present modification example 2, the mounted movable body 401 and the pseudo movable body display Z402 can be moved. It may also be possible to perform an effect using the movable object display Z402.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 14-42, the mounting movable body 401 as the second modification is a structure on which the character "A" is displayed, and The mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R in Modification 2 are movable between a first position and a second position below the first position, and are located at first predetermined positions on the left and right sides of the display area of the image display device 5. and a second predetermined position closer to the center than the first predetermined position, and the pseudo movable body display Z402 as modification example 2 can display the character "BODY", and the image display device The display can be moved between a first display position at the bottom of the display area of No. 5 and a second display position above the first display position. Note that detailed illustrations and explanations of the drive mechanisms of the movable mounting body 401 and the movable mounting bodies 501L and 501R will be omitted.

For example, when executing a performance using the mounted movable bodies 401, 501L, 501R and the pseudo movable body display Z402 in the aforementioned preview performances A, B, advanced performances A, B, etc., the performance control CPU 120 first As shown in FIG. 14-42(A), with the mounted movable body 401 and the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R waiting in the first position, the pseudo movable body display is displayed as shown in FIG. 14-42(B). After Z402 is displayed at the first display position, the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, as shown in FIG. 14-42(C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-42(D), the mounting movable body 401 is moved from the first position to the second position. Then, when the mounted movable body 401 moves to a position close to the pseudo movable body display Z402 displayed at the second display position, the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved and displayed toward the first display position. At this time, it is preferable to move and display the mounted movable body 401 on the pseudo movable body display Z402 so that it does not overlap.

Next, as shown in FIG. 14-42(E), when the mounted movable body 401 moves to the second position and the pseudo movable body display Z402 moves to the first display position, the mounted movable body 401 moves to the first position. The pseudo-combined state is the closest to the movable object display Z402 and the characters "combined" can be recognized. Then, as shown in FIG. 14-42(F), while maintaining the pseudo-combined state of the mounted movable body 401 and the pseudo movable body display Z402, the mounted movable body 401 is moved upward and the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved upward. By moving the display upward and further moving the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R to a second predetermined position, it is announced that the performance will develop due to the successful pseudo-combination.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 14-42 (G), the mounted movable body 401 and the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R are moved to the first position or the first predetermined position, and the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved to the first display position. The image is moved and displayed in a manner in which the image is divided into different first specific display positions (for example, positions on the left and right sides), and then erased in a manner in which the image is framed out to the left and right of the screen or faded out.

On the other hand, if it is decided to notify that the pseudo combination is not successful and the performance will not develop, etc., as shown in FIG. 14-42 (D), the mounted movable body 401 moves downward and the pseudo movement By decelerating and stopping the downward movement of the mounted movable body 401 while displaying the downward movement of the body display Z402, and displaying the pseudo movable body display Z402 with the upper part destroyed, It is reported that the pseudo-combination is not successful and the performance does not develop. In this way, the pseudo movable object display Z402 can easily realize effects that are difficult to realize with a movable object as a structure.

(Modification 3)
Next, a third modification of the characteristic portion 241SG will be described based on FIG. 14-43. In FIG. 14-43, (A) to (C) are diagrams showing a third modification of the characteristic portion 241SG.

In the feature section 241SG, the effect control CPU 120 exemplifies a form in which the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 can be moved and displayed between the first display position and the second display position. , the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to one that can perform reciprocating display in one direction such as the vertical direction or the horizontal direction. For example, the production control CPU 120 may be A) As shown in (B), after moving and displaying the first pseudo movable object display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, as shown in FIG. 14-43 (C), the first It may be possible to move and display in a direction different from the direction in which the movement and display are performed from the initial display position to the first effect display position.

As shown in FIG. 14-43 (C), at the first effect display position, only the effect display section Z200A is vertically rotated around the rotation axis pointing in the left-right direction. It is preferable to be able to perform various types of moving display, such as different rotational movement displays, and moving display in a manner that moves in a direction different from one direction (for example, the depth direction). By doing so, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance that is difficult to realize with a movable body.

Although the characteristic portion 241SG in the embodiment of this invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and changes and additions may be made without departing from the gist of this invention. are also included in this invention.

(Explanation regarding transformation and application)
In the feature section 241SG, an example is given in which the mounted movable body 32 is applied as a movable body mounted on the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple movable bodies other than the mounted movable body 32 are used. A movable body may be mounted on the pachinko game machine 1. Moreover, it is not limited to the board-side movable body provided on the game board 2, but may also be a frame-side movable body provided on the game machine frame 3 or an opening/closing door that can open and close the game machine frame 3. A pseudo movable body display imitating the side movable body may be movably displayed. Further, as the board-side movable body, it may be possible to display a pseudo movable body display that imitates a variable winning device or the like provided in connection with the game.

In addition, in the feature section 241SG, an example is illustrated in which a first non-mounted movable body M100 and a second non-mounted movable body M200 are applied as movable bodies that were scheduled to be installed in the pachinko game machine 1 but were not installed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and movable bodies other than the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200 were scheduled to be installed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but they were not installed. Good too.

Further, in the characteristic portion 241SG, when erasing the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200, the display is exemplified in such a manner that they are gradually faded out. The present invention is not limited to this, and an effect image may be displayed to emphasize that the image has been erased, or erasing may be performed using other methods.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the production position is the movement display distance L2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first production display position. A common effect image Z71 in which the glass is cracked and glass fragments are scattered is displayed when the mounted movable body 32 moves and when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed. Although the form in which sound effects are output is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the moving distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the production position is determined by the first pseudo movable body display Z100. An effect image that is longer than the movement display distance L2 from the initial display position to the first effect display position and that has different modes when the mounted movable body 32 moves and when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed. A different sound effect may be output at the same time as the display. By doing so, the movement of the mounted movable body 32 can be highlighted using the movement display of the pseudo movable body display.

In addition, in the feature section 241SG, during the variable display period of the super reach, the movement of the mounted movable body 32 can be executed up to two times in the development effect A and the determined effect, and the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is , the preview performance B and the decision performance can be executed up to two times, and the moving display of the second pseudo movable object display Z200 can be performed up to four times: the preview performance A, the preview performance B, the development suggestion performance, and the development performance B. Although a certain form has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement of the movable body or the movement display of the pseudo movable body display may be executed a number of times other than the above-mentioned number of times.

Furthermore, when the movable object is allowed to move a first number of times in one variable display period, it is possible to allow the pseudo-movable object display to move a second number of times, which is greater than the first number, in one variable display period. preferable. By doing this, instead of increasing the chances of performing the movable object display too much and lowering the jackpot expectation level, by increasing the opportunity to perform the pseudo-movable object display, the performance will be reduced. This can prevent you from losing interest.

Furthermore, in addition to the above-mentioned multiple performances, for example, during symbol promotion in the re-drawing after jackpot confirmation notification, or during jackpot production, the pseudo movable body display may be displayed moving, and the pseudo movable body displayed at that time may be moved. The movable body display may be a pseudo movable body display different from the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200.

In addition, preview performance A is applied as a special suggestion performance that suggests that the player will be controlled in an advantageous state, and development performance B is applied as a notification performance that informs the player of contents that are advantageous to the player, thereby indicating that the notification performance will be executed. A development suggestion performance is applied as a predetermined performance to suggest, a decision performance is applied as a special performance to notify that the control is in an advantageous state, and the special performance is suggested to be executed before the special performance is executed. Although a form in which preview performance B is applied as the specific performance has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and various performances other than those described above can be applied. Moreover, although these various effects can be performed in one variable display period of super reach, they may be effects that can be performed over a plurality of variable display periods.

Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, content that is advantageous to the player includes pseudo-runs, jackpots, small hits, reach, hold-up runs, chance-up effects, pre-read notice effects, time-savers and misses, and ceiling-time-savers control (described later). , variable display results, controls, and effects may be included. Further, in the slot machine, chance zone (CZ) winnings, assist time (AT) winnings, replay time (RT) winnings, bonus winnings, etc. may be included.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, when starting the display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200, the game effect lamps 9, etc. provided on the game board 2 and the gaming machine frame 3, etc. By reducing the brightness or turning off the lights, the display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 can be made conspicuous, while the display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 can be made conspicuous. When erasing, by increasing the brightness or turning on the game effect lamp 9 provided on the game board 2 or the gaming machine frame 3, the game on the first pseudo movable body display Z100 or the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is erased. can distract people's consciousness.

In addition, in the feature section 241SG, while it is possible to adjust the light intensity of the game effect lamps 9 and the like provided on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3 by the player's operation, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 It is preferable that the light amount adjustment of the light emitting display part Z108A and the light emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is made impossible by the player's operation. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the pseudo movable object display from being impaired or from becoming inconspicuous.

In addition, in the feature section 241SG, when hiding the second pseudo movable body display Z200 displayed at the first specific initial display position in the development suggestion production, the display area including the first specific production display position is Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the character image Z310 is displayed with priority as the notification-related image, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification-related image may be an image related to the notification effect (for example, development effect B). If available, images other than character images (for example, images imitating smoke, fog, waves, etc.) may be used.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, in the advanced production B, a mode is shown in which the reach title image Z51 is displayed as a suggestion image suggesting execution of the final production in the manner at the start of display, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, images other than the reach title image may be used as the suggestion image (for example, a character image that appears in a strong super reach effect or a decisive effect) as long as it suggests the execution of a specific effect. .

Furthermore, in the characteristic section 241SG, a mode has been exemplified in which the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 can be displayed in separate periods, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, a plurality of pseudo movable object displays may be displayed moving during a common period. In this case, for example, the movable and displayable range of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the movable and displayable range of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 overlap, and the first pseudo movable body display Z100 overlaps in the overlapping area. and the second pseudo movable body display Z200, by displaying one of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 on a display layer on the front side of the other, Since it is possible to make people conscious of the front and rear positional relationship, it is possible to realize a more realistic performance.

Further, in the characteristic section 241SG, it is taken into consideration that the mechanism display sections Z100B and Z200B of the first pseudo movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo movable object display Z200 are displayed cut off at the edge of the display area of the image display device 5. Then, the mounted movable body, center decorative frame, etc. may be arranged so as to cover up the part where the display of the mechanism display section of the pseudo movable body display starts in the display area of the image display device 5, or the mounted movable body The part where the display of the mechanism display section of the pseudo movable body display starts may be made difficult to see by moving the body.

In addition, in the feature section 241SG, the display result of the variable display has been exemplified as including "time saving error"; The variable display will be displayed a specified number of times (for example, 900 times, etc.) from the time when one of the following is established: performing a clearing process to clear the counter and buffer, controlling the game to a jackpot gaming state, and displaying the display result as a time-saving result. ) Based on what has been done, it may be possible to execute ceiling time saving control that controls the time saving state without going through the jackpot game state. Note that the internal count of the specified number of times is reset when the predetermined condition is satisfied, and the number of time reductions in the time reduction state due to the ceiling time reduction control (for example, 900 times) is different from the number of time reductions in the normal time reduction state (for example, 100 times). may be different.

When the ceiling time saving control as described above is executed and the number of executions of the variable display reaches the specified number of times without the above predetermined condition being satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 controls the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second It may be possible to perform a moving display of a pseudo movable object display such as the pseudo movable object display Z200. In this way, it may be possible to perform the moving display of the pseudo movable object display in each notification such as notification of a jackpot, notification of a time-saving hit or loss, notification of ceiling time-saving control, etc., and in each notification, the type of pseudo-movable object display and the moving display may be executed. The aspects may also be different.

In addition, in the feature section 241SG, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed in a moving manner as a notification of a jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display result may be a small win or a time-saving display. In the case of a miss or when the above-mentioned ceiling time saving control is executed, the first pseudo movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo movable object display Z200 are moved to notify you of a small hit or a loss of time saving, and to perform the ceiling time saving control. While notifying that the execution condition has been met, if the variable display result indicates a jackpot, the jackpot may be notified by moving the mounted movable body 32.

In addition, a common type of pseudo-movable object display is used to notify when the display result of the variable display is a small hit or time-saving loss, and when the display result of the variable display is a jackpot, but the movable display The embodiments may be different. In addition, when the display result of the variable display is a small hit or time-saving loss, and when the display result of the variable display is a jackpot, a pseudo-movable object display is used to notify, but the type of pseudo-movable object display is It may be different.

Further, in the characteristic section 241SG, a so-called pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a variable state after the end of a jackpot game is applied as an example of the pachinko game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may also be a so-called 1 type 2 type gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state by generating a V prize triggered by a small win in a time saving state after the end of a jackpot game, and the gaming characteristics can be changed in various ways. be.

Further, in the embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as an example of a game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined number of game balls are The loaned balls that are recirculated inside the machine and are lent out in response to a player's lending request and the number of prize balls given in response to winnings are added up, while the number of game balls used in the game is counted. The present invention can also be applied to so-called enclosed game machines in which subtraction is performed and stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, scores and points are awarded to the player instead of game balls, so these awarded scores and points correspond to the gaming value.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium, and for example, non-spherical game balls such as medals, It may be a medium.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a pachinko game machine is applied as an example of a game machine, but a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using, for example, a game value. At the same time, one game ends when a variable display result is derived to a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, each of which can be identified. It is also applicable to slot machines that allow winnings to occur.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Furthermore, the gaming machine that allows games may be any machine that allows at least playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, but may be general gaming machines.

1... Pachinko gaming machine 11... Main board 12... Performance control board

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
A performance execution means capable of performing the performance,
a variable winning means that can change between a first state in which the game medium is easy to win and a second state in which the game medium is impossible or difficult to win ;
A control means capable of executing a round game that changes the variable winning means to the first state,
When the round game is played, after a predetermined period has elapsed after the variable winning means changes from the second state to the first state, displaying an award amount display regarding the award amount of gaming value ;
If the game medium does not win in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a predetermined display corresponding to the fact that no gaming value has been awarded can be displayed at the start of the award amount display ;
If the game medium wins in the variable winning means within the predetermined period, a count-up display corresponding to the award of gaming value is performed at the start of the award amount display , and then a specific display different from the predetermined display is displayed. It is possible to display
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a special effect that notifies that the vehicle is controlled to the advantageous state,
A specific performance can be executed before the special performance is executed,
The display means is
The pseudo movable body display can be displayed in a moving manner in the specific performance and the special performance,
When moving and displaying the pseudo movable object display in the specific performance, the pseudo movable object display can be moved from the first display position to the second display position and then hidden;
When moving and displaying the pseudo movable object display in the special performance, the pseudo movable object display can be moved from the first display position to the second display position and then hidden;
A gaming machine characterized by: